# Bộ sưu tập đề thi thử THPT Quốc gia năm 2016 môn Tiếng Anh

Chia sẻ: Lê Na | Ngày: | 11 đề thi

0
9.839
lượt xem
1.585
Sở Giáo dục- Đào tạo Thanh Hoá ́ ĐỀ THI THỬ THPT QUÔC GIA LẦN I NĂM HỌC 2015 – 2016 Trường THPT Bỉm Sơn Môn : Tiếng Anh Thời gian làm bài : 90 phút, không kể thời gian phát đề (Đề này gồm 06 trang ) Mã đề thi 209 Họ, tên thí sinh:.......................................................................... Số báo danh:............................................................................... SECTION A (8 points): Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer that best completes each unfinished sentence. Question 1. This is a valuable ................ chair which dates back to the eighteeth century. A. traditional B. old-fashioned C. ancient D. antique Question 2. I read the contract again and again _________ avoiding making spelling mistakes. A. with a view to B. by means of C. in terms of D. in view of Question 3. The girls and flowers ______ he painted were vivid. A. whose B. that C. which D. who Question 4. Look! The yard is wet. It______ last night. A. must rain B. couldn't have rained C. must have rained D. should have rained Question 5. Last year she earned _______ her brother. A. twice as much as B. twice more than C. twice as many as D. twice as more as Question 6. ________he study harder, he will do better in the exam. A. Unless B. If C.When D. Should Question 7.This is the __________spot on which the first pilgrims landed in America. A. historic B. historical C. history D. historicity Question 8. Is it necessary that I _____ here tomorrow? A. am being B. were C. would be D. be Question 9. Van Gogh suffered from depression ______ by overwork and ill-health. A. brought on B. taken up C. coming about D. pull through Question 10. I saw him hiding something in a_______ bag. A. small black plastic B. black small plastic C. small plastic black D. plastic small black Question 11. She earned a degree in Physics and went on _________ another degree in Mathematics. A. to take B. taking C. taken D. being taken Question 12. Harry:" ______________" Kate: "Yes. I'd like to buy a computer." A. Do you look for something? B. Good morning. Can I help you? C. Excuse me. Do you want to buy it? D. Can you help me buy something? Question 13. Those trousers are far too big. Why don’t you have them___? A. taken in B . taken on C. taken over D. taken out Question 14. When his alarm went off, he shut it off and slept for ________15 minutes. A. other B. others C. another D. the others Question 15. So little_______about mathematics that the lecture was completely beyond me. A. I have known B. I knew C. did I know D. do I know Question 16. I gave the waiter a $50 note and waited for my _________. A. cost B. supply C. change D. cash Question 17. He had spent ____________ time writing an essay on his childhood. A. a few B. a large number of C. a great deal of D. many Trang 1/6 - Mã đề thi 209 Question 18 When there are small children around, it is better to put breakable ornaments out of _____. A. reach B. hand C. place D. hold Question 19. Tom: “ Sorry, I forgot to phone you last night.” -Mary: “________” A. I have nothing to tell you. B. Never mind! C. Oh. Poor me! D. You was absent - minded. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) CLOSEST in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 20. It is hoped that illiteracy will soon be eradicated in our country as more and more people are struggling against it. A. evolving B. striving C. starting D. plunging Question 21. Whenever Susan invites us to dinner, she customarily prepares a lot of delicious food. A. naturally B. necessarily C. usually D. certainly Question 22. His new yatch is certainly an ostentatious display of his wealth. A. showy B. beautiful C. large D. expensive Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 23 to 32. Ethology is concerned with the study of adaptive, or survival, value of behavior and its Evolutionary history. Ethological theory began to be applied to research on children in the1960’s but has become even more influential today. The origins of ethology can be traced to the work of Darwin. Its modern foundations were laid by two European zoologists, Konrad Lorenz and Niko Tinbergen. Watching the behaviors diverse animal species in their natural habitats, Lorenz, and Tinbergen observed behavior patterns that promote survival. The most well-known of these is imprinting, the early following behavior of certain baby birds that ensures that the young will stay close to their mother and be fed and protected from danger. Imprinting takes place during an early, restricted time period of development. If the mother goose is not present during this time, but an object resembling her in important features is, young goslings may imprint on it instead . Observations of imprinting led to major concept that has been applied in child development” the critical period . It refers to a limited times span during which the child is biologically prepared to acquire certain adaptive behaviors but needs the support of suitably stimulating environment. Many researchers have conducted studies to find out whether complex cognitive and social behaviors must be learned during restricted time periods. for example, if children are deprived of adequate food or physical and social stimulation during the early years of life, will their intelligence be permanently impaired? If language is not mastered during the preschool years, is the child’s capacity to acquire it reduced? Inspired by observations of imprinting, in 1969 the British psychoanalyst John Bowlby applied ethological theory to the understanding of the relationship between an infant and its parents. He argued that attachment behaviors of babies, such as smiling, babbling, grasping, and crying, are built-in social signals that encourage the parents to approach, care for, and interact with the baby. By keeping a parent near, these behaviors help ensure that the baby will be fed, protected from danger, and provided with the stimulation and affection necessary for healthy growth. The development of attachment in human infants is a lengthy process involving changes in psychological structures that lead to a deep affectional tie between parent and baby. Question 23: According to the passage, attachment behaviors of infants are intended to___________. A. prepare the infant to cope with separation B. get the physical, emotional and social needs of the infant met C. allow the infant to become imprinted on objects that resemble the parent D. provide the infant with a means of self-stimulation Trang 2/6 - Mã đề thi 209 Question 24: The word “foundations” in line 4 is closest in meaning to______. A. discoveries B. inventions C. institutions D. researches Question 25: According to the passage, if a mother goose is not present during the time period when imprinting takes place, which of the following will most likely occur? A. The gosling may imprint on another object. B.The gosling may not find a mate when it matures. C.The gosling will not imprint on any object. D. The mother will later imprint on the gosling. Question 26: It can be inferred from the passage that ethological theory assumes that __________. A. failure to imprint has no influence on intelligence B. to learn about human behavior only human subjects should be studied C. there are similarities between animal and human behavior D. the notion of critical periods applies only to animals Question 27: The word “He” in line 19 refers to __________. A. a psychoanalyst B. an infant C. parent D. a baby Question 28: The author mentions all of the following as attachment behaviors of human infants EXCEPT _________. A. crying B. eating C. smiling D. grasping Question 29: The word “ensures” in line 7 is closest in meaning to ________. A. assumes B. guarantees C. proves D. teaches Question 30: What was Darwin’s contribution to ethology? A. Darwin was the first person to apply ethological theory to children. B. Darwin improved on the original principles of ethology. C. Darwin was the professor who taught Lorenz and Tinbergen. D. Darwin’s work provided the basis for ethology. Question 31: The phrase “affectional tie” in line 24 is closest in meaning to _________. A. behavioral change B. emotional attachment C. cognitive development D. psychological need Question 32: The word “acquire” in line 12 is closest in meaning to __________. A. have B. reach C. gain D. work Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 33. After writing it, the essay must be duplicated by the student himself and handed in to the A B C department secretary before the end of the month. D Question 34. Although no country has exactly the same folk music as those of any other, it is A B significant that similar songs exist among widely separated people. C D Question 35. All of the cities in Texas, San Antonio is probably the most picturesque. A B C D Question 36. The Indians of the southwestern United States are famous for their beautiful A art work, especially handmade jewelry cast from silver, carved from stones, or decorations with B C D beads and feathers. Trang 3/6 - Mã đề thi 209 Question 37. My cousin composes not only the music, but also sings the songs for the maior A B C D Broadway musicals. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the words whose pronunciation is different from the others in each of the following questions. Question 38: A. washes B. stops C. works D. speaks Question 39. A. amount B. astound C. mouthful D. shoulder Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the rest in the position of the main stress in each of the following questions. Question 40. A. apply B. visit C. appear D. attend Question 41. A. physical B. marvellous C. suspicious D. argument Question 42. A. kindergarten B. curriculum C. contaminate D.conventional Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 43 to 52. Basic to any understanding of Canada in the 20 years after the Second World War is the country’s impressive population growth. For every three Canadians in 1945, there were over five in 1966. In September 1966 Canada’s population passed the 20 million mark. Most of his surging growth came from natural increase. The depression of the 1930’s and the war had held back marriages, and the catching-up process began after 1945. The baby boom continued through the decade of the 1950’s, producing a population increase of nearly fifteen percent in the five years from 1951 to 1956. This rate of increase had been exceeded only once before settle. Undoubtedly, the good economic conditions of the 1950’s supported a growth in the population, but the expansion also derived from a trend toward earlier marriages and an increase in the average size of families. In 1957 the Canadian birth rate stood at 28 per thousand, one of the highest in the world. After the peak year of 1957, the birth rate in Canada began to decline. It continued falling until in 1966 it stood at the lowest level in 25 years. Partly this decline reflected the low level of births during the depression and the war, but it was also caused by changes in Canadian society. Young people were staying at school longer; more women were working; young married couples were buying automobiles or houses before starting families; rising living standards were cutting down the size of families. It appeared that Canada was once more falling in step with the trend toward smaller families that had occurred all through the Western world since the time of the Industrial Revolution. Although the growth in Canada’s population had slowed down by 1966 (the increase in the first half of the 1960’s was only nine percent), another large population wave was coming over the horizon. It would be composed of the children who were born during the period of the high birth rate prior to 1957. Question 43. According to the passage, when did Canada’s baby boom begin? A. In the decade after 1911 B. In 1966 C. During the depression of the 1930’s D. After 1945 Question 44. It can be inferred from the passage that before the Industrial Revolution _________. A. economic conditions were bad B. population statistics were unreliable C. the population grew steadily. D. families were larger Question 45. The word “five” in line 2 refers to__________. A. Canadians B. decades C. years D. marriages Question 46. The author suggests that in Canada during the 1950’s____. A. the urban population decreased rapidly B. fewer people married C. the birth rate was very high D. economic conditions were poor Trang 4/6 - Mã đề thi 209 Question 47. The author mentions all of the following as causes of declines in population growth after 1957 EXCEPT__________. A. people getting married earlier B. people being better educated C. better standards of living D. couples buying houses Question 48. The word “surging” in line 3 is closest in meaning to__________. A. accelerating B. extra C. new D. surprising Question 49. The word “trend” in line 8 is closest in meaning to__________. A. growth B. tendency C. aim D. directive Question 50. What does the passage mainly discuss? A. Educational changes in Canadian society. B. Canada during the Second World War. C. Population trends in postwar Canada. D. Standards of living in Canada. Question 51. When was the birth rate in Canada at its lowest postwar level? A.1956 B. 1957 C. 1966 D. 1951 Question 52. The word “peak” in line 11 is closest in meaning to___________. A. pointed B. dismal C. mountain D. maximum Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks from 53 to 62. Environmental Concerns Earth is the only place we know of in the universe that can support human life. (53) ______ human activities are making the planet less fit to live on. As the western world carries on consuming (54)_______ of the world's resources while half of the world's population do so just to stay (55)_______ we are rapidly destroying the only resource we have (56)________ which all people can survive and prosper. Everywhere fertile soil is (57)______ built on or washed into the sea. Renewable resources are exploited so much that they will never be able to recover (58)______. We discharge pollutants into the atmosphere without any thought of the consequences. As a (59)______, the planet's ability to support people is being reduced at the very time when rising human numbers and consumption are making increasingly heavy demands on it. The Earth's (60)______ resources are there for us to use. We need food, water, air, energy, medicines, warmth, shelter and minerals to (61)______ us fed, comfortable, healthy and active. If we are sensible in how we use the resources they will last indefinitely. But if we use them wastefully and excessively they will soon (62)_______ and everyone will suffer. Question 53: A. Still B. Despite C. Yet D. Although Question 54: A. two-three B. two- third C. two-thirds D. two-threes Question 55: A. survival B. existent C. alive D. live Question 56: A. on B. at C. in D. by Question 57: A. sooner B. rather C. either D. neither Question 58: A. completely B. greatly C. quite D. utterly Question 59: A. development B. product C. result D. reaction Question 60: A. natural B. real C. living D. genuine Question 61: A. stay B. keep C. maintain D. hold Question 62: A. run away B. run out C. run up D. run off Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 63: The aircraft carrier is indispensable in naval operations against sea or shore based enemies. A. unique B. unnecessary C. novel D. exotic Question 64. This shouldn’t be too taxing for you. A. comfortable B. demanding C. easy D. relaxing Trang 5/6 - Mã đề thi 209 SECTION B (2 points): I.Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it.Write your answers on your answer sheet.(0,5 points). Question 1: Mr. Smith knew little about the Internet, so he didn’t invest into any computer companies. Had …………………………………………………………………….................. Question 2: Mary started learning English 3 years ago. Mary has .............................................................................. Question 3: It is said that the Great Pyramid of Giza was built over a 20-year period. The Great Pyramid of Giza ……………………………………………………… Question 4: We can’t have breakfast in the garden because it is very cold. It is so………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Question 5: Immediately after his arrival, things went wrong. Hardly………………………………………………………………………………. II. In about 140 words, write a paragraph about the benefits of playing sports. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet.(1,5 points). The following prompts might be helpful to you. - Keeping fit and healthy - Entertaining and relaxing - Earning money ----------- THE END ---------- Trang 6/6 - Mã đề thi 209 SỞ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO BẮC NINH ĐỀ THI THỬ THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN I TRƯỜNG THPT LÝ THÁI TỔ MÔN TIẾNG ANH Ngày thi : 8/11/2015 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Đề thi gồm 7 trang) M· ®Ò thi: 132 Họ, tên thí sinh: …………………………………………….. Lớp: ………… Số báo danh: ……… Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 1: _____ that Marie was able to retire at the age of 50. A. So was her successful business, B. So successful was her business C. Her business was successful D. So successful her business was, Question 2: - “Can I carry these suitcases into the room for you?” - “______” A. You can’t, I think! B. No, you can’t. C. Yes, you can. D. Can you? That’s very kind. Question 3: My mother ______ me against staying late night after night to prepare for exams. A recommended B. encouraged C. warned D. reprimanded Question 4: She must have been sleepless last night. Otherwise, her eyes _______ so bloody now. A. won’t look B. wouldn’t look C. wouldn’t have looked D. looked Question 5: I’ve never really enjoyed going to the ballet or the opera; they’re not really my ______ A. chip off the old block B. biscuit C. cup of tea D. piece of cake Question 6: After we each had been assigned an installment part of the project, we came back to our _______ section. A. respectively B. respectful C. irrespective D. respective Question 7: Before you start cooking, you should gather together all the necessary _________ A. elements B. factors C. ingredients D. substances Question 8: The last person _____ will have to turn off the lights. A. left B. leaving C. have left D. to leave Question 9: This shirt is ______ that one. A. a bit less expensive B. as much expensive as C. not nearly as expensive as D. much far expensive than Question 10: My friend bought ___________ from a shop on Tran Phu street. A. a brown nice leather belt B. a nice brown leather belt C. a leather brown nice belt D. a nice leather brown belt Question 11: The new manager found the situation so complicated that he couldn’t see the wood for the _________ A. leaf B. fruit C. wood D. trees Mã đề 132 1/7 Question 12: A: I think it is a good idea to have three or four generations living under one roof. B: _________ Family members can help each other a lot. A. It's not true. B. That's wrong. C. I couldn't agree any more. D. I don't agree. Question 13: Ann: How well you are playing, Peter! Peter: _________. A. Say it again. I like to hear your words B. Thank you too much C. I think so. I'm proud of myself D. Many thanks, that's a nice compliment Question 14: The teacher as well as his students____________ at the school meeting yet. A. arrived B. hasn’t arrived C. haven’t arrived D. not arriving Question 15: "Why wasn't your boyfriend at the party last night?" - "He ______ the lecture at Shaw Hall. I know he very much wanted to hear the speaker." A. may have attended B. was to attend C. should have attended D. can have attended Question 16: “We’d better __________ if we want to get there in time” A. take up B. turn down C. speed up D. put down Question 17: Nowadays, most students use _______ calculators in their studies and examinations A. electrical B. electricity C. electric D.electronic Question 18: It is essential that Alice __________ about his responsibilities in the meeting tomorrow. A. be reminded B. must remind C. will be reminded D. will remind Question 19: The use of computers aids in teaching, __________ the role of teachers is still very important. A. although B. yet C. so that D. because Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) SIMILAR in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 20: Within a week on display at the exhibition, the painting was hailed as a masterpiece. A. a down- to – earth work of art B. an excellent work of art C. an expensive work of art D. a large work of art Question 21: Deer like figures made from willow shoots are the oldest evidence of human habitation in the Grand Canyon. A. proof B. clue C. dispute D. exhibit Question 22: He drives me to the edge because he never stops talking. A. frightens me B. moves me C. irritates me D. steers me Question 23: I think we can safely say now that we have got our money back, we are home and dry. A. have got home dry B. have been successful C. have not got wet D. have got no water Question 24: Roget's Thesaurus, a collection of English words and phrases, was originally arranged by the ideas they express rather than by alphabetical order. A. unless B. instead of C. restricted D. as well as Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Question 25: A. resort B. position C. pleasure D. desert Mã đề 132 2/7 Question 26: A. helped B. wicked C. knocked D. coughed Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to show the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 27: The longest mountain range, the Mid-Atlantic Range, is not hardly visible because A B most of it lies under the ocean. C D Question 28: Establishing in 1984 for students who wanted to study art and music subjects, A B LaGuardia was the first public school of its kind. C D Question 29: The abilities to work hard, follow directions, and thinking independently are some of the A B C criteria for success in the workplace. D Question 30: The old woman cannot remember the place which she kept her savings A B C D Question 31: I think she will be suitable for the work because she has been working like a teacher for a long time. A B C D Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the question below. We find that bright children are rarely held back by mixed-ability teaching. On the contrary, both their knowledge and experience are enriched. We feel that there are many disadvantages in streaming pupils. It does not take into account the fact that children develop at different rates. It can have a bad effect on both the bright and the not-so-bright child. After all, it can be quite discouraging to be at the bottom of the top grade! Besides, it is rather unreal to grade people just according to their intellectual ability. This is only one aspect of their total personality. We are concerned to develop the abilities of all our pupils to the full, not just their academic ability. We also value personal qualities and social skills, and we find that mixed-ability teaching contributes to all these aspects of learning. In our classroom, we work in various ways. The pupils often work in groups; this gives them the opportunity to learn to co-operate, to share, and to develop leadership skills. They also learn how to cope with the personal problems as well as learning how to think, to make decisions, to analyze and evaluate, to communicate effectively. The pupils learn from each other as well as from the teachers. Sometimes the pupils work in pairs; sometimes the work on individual tasks and assignments, they can do this at their own speed. They also have some formal class teaching when this is appropriate. We encourage our pupils to use the library, and we teach them the skills they need in order to do this effectively. An advanced pupil can do advanced works; it does not matter what age the child is. We expect our pupils to do their best, not their least, and we give them every encouragement to attain this goal. Question 32: In the passage, the author’s attitude towards “mixed-ability teaching” is ________ A. questioning B. approving C. objective D. critical Question 33: The phrase “held back” in paragraph 1 means ______ A. prevented from advancing B. forced to study in lower class Mã đề 132 3/7 C. made to remain in the same classes D. made to lag behind Question 34: The author argues that a teacher’s chief concern should be the development of the pupils’ _________ A. learning ability and communicative skills B. intellectual abilities C. total personality D. personal and social skills Question 35: Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage? A. Group work provides the pupils with the opportunity to learn to be capable organizers B. Pupils also learn how to participate in teaching activities C. Group work gives pupils the opportunity to learn to work together with others D. Pupils also learn to develop their reasoning ability Question 36: The author’s purpose of writing this passage is to _________ A. recommend pair work and group work classroom activities B. offer advice on the proper use of the school library C. argue for teaching bright and not-so-bright pupils in the same class. D. emphasize the importance of appropriate formal classroom teaching Question 37: According to the passage, which of the following is NOT true? A. Development of pupils as individuals is not the aim of group work B. Pupils cannot develop in the best way if they are streamed into classes of different intellectual abilities C. It’s not good for a bright child to find out that he performs worst in a mixed-ability class D. There is no fixed method in teaching pupils to develop themselves to the full Question 38: According to the passage, which of the following is an advantage of mixed-ability teaching? A. Formal class teaching is the important way to give pupils essential skills such as those to be used in the library. B. Pupils as individuals always have the opportunities to work on their own. C. A pupil can be at the bottom of a class D. Pupils can be hindered from an all-round development Question 39: Which of the following statements can best summarize the main idea of the passage? A. The aim of education is to find out how to teach the bright and not-so-bright pupils B. Various ways of teaching should be encouraged in class C. Children, in general, develop at different rates D. Bright children do benefit from mixed-ability teaching Question 40: According to the passage, “streaming pupils” ______ A. is the act of putting pupils into class according to their academic abilities B. aims at enriching both their knowledge and experience C. is quite discouraging D. will help the pupils learn best Question 41: According to the author, mixed-ability teaching is more preferable because _______ A. children can learn to work with each other to solve personal problems Mã đề 132 4/7 B. it doesn’t have disadvantages as in streaming pupils C. formal class teaching is appropriate D. its aim at developing the children’s total personality Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions Throughout history people have always communicated with one another, not only by speech but also by movements of the hands and body. It is, however, only (42) ______ the last few years that these aspects of communication have been studied at all widely. This type of communication is known as body language or non-verbal communication. People sometimes wonder (43) ______ you can learn how body language works. It is of course possible to read books on the subject but you also need to (44) ______ time observing people’s movements. A railway station is a particular good place for such observation, as here people can be seen openly expressing eagerness, sorrow, delight, impatience and many other human emotions by (45) _____ of movement. If you turn down the sound on your television set and try to understand (46) _____ is happening simply by watching the picture you will learn even more about communication (47) _____ words. By turning the sound back up every five (48) ______ or so, it is possible to check how accurate your (49) ______ is. Having studied the art of body language you will have a definite (50) ______ at a boring party. You will be able to sit on your own for the whole evening and thoroughly enjoy yourself by both watching (51) ______ interpreting the body language of all the other people there. Question 42: A. with B. during C. for D. on Question 43: A. that B. how C. what D. whether Question 44: A. kill B. spend C. give D. lose Question 45: A. means B. gestures C. health D. postures Question 46: A. who B. which C. what D. that Question 47: A. and B. including C. without D. with Question 48: A. years B. minutes C. hours D. months Question 49: A. expression B. understanding C. meaning D. movement Question 50: A. benefit B. favour C. disadvantage D. advantage Question 51: A. with B. and C. but D. or Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Long before they can actually speak, babies pay special attention to the speech they hear around them. Within the first month of their lives, babies' responses to the sound of the human voice will be different from their responses to other sorts of auditory stimuli. They will stop crying when they hear a person talking, but not if they hear a bell or the sound of a rattle. At first, the sounds that an infant notices might be only those words that receive the heaviest emphasis and that often occur at the ends of utterances. By the time they are six or seven weeks old, babies can detect the difference between syllables pronounced with rising and falling inflections. Very soon, these differences in adult stress and intonation can influence babies' emotional states and behavior. Long before they develop actual language comprehension, babies can sense when an adult is playful or angry, attempting to initiate or Mã đề 132 5/7 terminate new behavior, and so on, merely on the basis of cues such as the rate, volume, and melody of adult speech. Adults make it as easy as they can for babies to pick up a language by exaggerating such cues. One researcher observed babies and their mothers in six diverse cultures and found that, in all six languages, the mothers used simplified syntax, short utterances and nonsense sounds, and transformed certain sounds into baby talk. Other investigators have noted that when mothers talk to babies who are only a few months old, they exaggerate the pitch, loudness, and intensity of their words. They also exaggerate their facial expressions, hold vowels longer, and emphasize certain words. More significant for language development than their response to general intonation is observation that tiny babies can make relatively fine distinctions between speech sounds. In other words, babies enter the world with the ability to make precisely those perceptual discriminations that are necessary if they are to acquire aural language. Babies obviously derive pleasure from sound input, too: even as young as nine months they will listen to songs or stories, although the words themselves are beyond their understanding. For babies, language is a sensory-motor delight rather than the route to prosaic meaning that it often is for adults. Question 52: Which of the following can be inferred about the findings described in paragraph 2? A. Babies ignore facial expressions in comprehending aural language. B. Mothers from different cultures speak to their babies in similar ways. C. Babies who are exposed to more than one language can speak earlier than babies exposed to a single language. D. The mothers observed by the researchers were consciously teaching their babies to speak. Question 53: According to the author, why do babies listen to songs and stories, even though they cannot understand them? A. They can remember them easily. B. They focus on the meaning of their parents' word. C. They enjoy the sound. D. They understand the rhythm. Question 54: The passage mentions all of the followings as the ways adults modify their speech when talking to babies EXCEPT ______________. A. speaking with shorter sentences B. giving all words equal emphasis C. using meaningless sounds A. speaking more loudly than normal Question 55: The word "diverse" is closest in meaning to ______________. A. different B. surrounding C. stimulating D. divided Question 56: The word "They" refers to ______________. A. words B. mothers C. investigators D. babies Question 57: Why does the author mention "a bell and a rattle"? A. To contrast the reactions of babies to human and nonhuman sounds B. To give examples of typical toys that babies do not like C. To explain how babies distinguish between different nonhuman sounds D. To give examples of sounds that will cause a baby to cry Question 58: What does the passage mainly discuss? A. The differences between a baby's and an adult's ability to comprehend language B. How babies perceive and respond to the human voice in their earliest stages of language development Mã đề 132 6/7 C. The response of babies to sounds other than the human voice D. How babies differentiate between the sound of the human voice and other sounds Question 59: The word "emphasize" is closest in meaning to ______________. A. stress B. leave out C. explain D. repeat Question 60: What point does the author make to illustrate that babies are born with the ability to acquire language? A. Babies exaggerate their own sounds and expressions. B. Babies begin to understand words in songs. C. Babies notice even minor differences between speech sounds. D. Babies are more sensitive to sounds than are adults. Question 61: The word "noted" is closest in meaning to______________. A. requested B. observed C. theorized D. disagreed Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 62: A. humidity B. necessary C. endangered D. incredible Question 63: A. economics B. achievement C. dependent D. technology Question 64: A. understand B. expedition C. electronic D. insurance WRITING Part I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Question 65: He was very sorry that he didn't see Andrey on her trip to London. He greatly regretted ______________________________________ Question 66: The plane had hardly left the airport when the accident happened. No sooner _______________________________________________ Question 67: Although she said that she would come, I don’t think she ever will. Despite _________________________________________ Question 68: Most people think Nigel is the best racing driver in the world. Nigel is considered _____________________________________ Question 69: “Unless I receive her letter tomorrow, I’ll phone her,” said Nam Nam said that if ______________________________________ Part II: In about 140 words, write a paragraph about the importance of family in your life. The following prompt might be helpful to you. - supporting us - sharing feelings, secrets, problems … - helping us improve our personality ------------- THE END --------------- Mã đề 132 7/7 SỞ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO BẮC NINH ĐỀ THI THỬ THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN I TRƯỜNG THPT LÝ THÁI TỔ MÔN TIẾNG ANH Ngày thi : 8/11/2015 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Đề thi gồm 7 trang) M· ®Ò thi: 194 Họ, tên thí sinh: …………………………………………….. Lớp: ………… Số báo danh: ……… Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the question below. We find that bright children are rarely held back by mixed-ability teaching. On the contrary, both their knowledge and experience are enriched. We feel that there are many disadvantages in streaming pupils. It does not take into account the fact that children develop at different rates. It can have a bad effect on both the bright and the not-so-bright child. After all, it can be quite discouraging to be at the bottom of the top grade! Besides, it is rather unreal to grade people just according to their intellectual ability. This is only one aspect of their total personality. We are concerned to develop the abilities of all our pupils to the full, not just their academic ability. We also value personal qualities and social skills, and we find that mixed-ability teaching contributes to all these aspects of learning. In our classroom, we work in various ways. The pupils often work in groups; this gives them the opportunity to learn to co-operate, to share, and to develop leadership skills. They also learn how to cope with the personal problems as well as learning how to think, to make decisions, to analyze and evaluate, to communicate effectively. The pupils learn from each other as well as from the teachers. Sometimes the pupils work in pairs; sometimes the work on individual tasks and assignments, they can do this at their own speed. They also have some formal class teaching when this is appropriate. We encourage our pupils to use the library, and we teach them the skills they need in order to do this effectively. An advanced pupil can do advanced works; it does not matter what age the child is. We expect our pupils to do their best, not their least, and we give them every encouragement to attain this goal. Question 1: According to the passage, which of the following is NOT true? A. It’s not good for a bright child to find out that he performs worst in a mixed-ability class B. Development of pupils as individuals is not the aim of group work C. There is no fixed method in teaching pupils to develop themselves to the full D. Pupils cannot develop in the best way if they are streamed into classes of different intellectual abilities Question 2: According to the passage, which of the following is an advantage of mixed-ability teaching? A. Pupils as individuals always have the opportunities to work on their own.Formal class teaching is the important way to give pupils essential skills such as those to be used in the library. B. Pupils can be hindered from an all-round development C. Formal class teaching is the important way to give pupils essential skills such as those to be used in the library. D. A pupil can be at the bottom of a class Question 3: Which of the following statements can best summarize the main idea of the passage? A. Children, in general, develop at different rates Mã đề 194 1/7 B. Various ways of teaching should be encouraged in class C. The aim of education is to find out how to teach the bright and not-so-bright pupils D. Bright children do benefit from mixed-ability teaching Question 4: According to the passage, “streaming pupils” ______ A. is quite discouraging B. aims at enriching both their knowledge and experience C. is the act of putting pupils into class according to their academic abilities D. will help the pupils learn best Question 5: According to the author, mixed-ability teaching is more preferable because _______ A. it doesn’t have disadvantages as in streaming pupils B. formal class teaching is appropriate C. its aim at developing the children’s total personality D. children can learn to work with each other to solve personal problems Question 6: In the passage, the author’s attitude towards “mixed-ability teaching” is ________ A. approving B. questioning C. critical D. objective Question 7: The phrase “held back” in paragraph 1 means ______ A. forced to study in lower class B. made to lag behind C. made to remain in the same classes D. prevented from advancing Question 8: The author argues that a teacher’s chief concern should be the development of the pupils’ _________ A. total personality B. learning ability and communicative skills C. intellectual abilities D. personal and social skills Question 9: Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage? A. Pupils also learn to develop their reasoning ability B. Pupils also learn how to participate in teaching activities C. Group work gives pupils the opportunity to learn to work together with others D. Group work provides the pupils with the opportunity to learn to be capable organizers Question 10: The author’s purpose of writing this passage is to _________ A. emphasize the importance of appropriate formal classroom teaching B. offer advice on the proper use of the school library C. argue for teaching bright and not-so-bright pupils in the same class. D. recommend pair work and group work classroom activities Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions Throughout history people have always communicated with one another, not only by speech but also by movements of the hands and body. It is, however, only (11) ______ the last few years that these aspects of communication have been studied at all widely. This type of communication is known as body language or non-verbal communication. People sometimes wonder (12) ______ you can learn how body language works. It is of course possible to read books on the subject but you also need to (13) ______ time observing people’s movements. A railway station is a particular good place for such observation, as here people can be seen openly expressing eagerness, sorrow, delight, impatience and many other human emotions by (14) _____ of movement. Mã đề 194 2/7 If you turn down the sound on your television set and try to understand (15) _____ is happening simply by watching the picture you will learn even more about communication (16) _____ words. By turning the sound back up every five (17) ______ or so, it is possible to check how accurate your (18) ______ is. Having studied the art of body language you will have a definite (19) ______ at a boring party. You will be able to sit on your own for the whole evening and thoroughly enjoy yourself by both watching (20) ______ interpreting the body language of all the other people there. Question 11: A. during B. for C. on D. with Question 12: A. how B. that C. what D. whether Question 13: A. kill B. spend C. give D. lose Question 14: A. gestures B. health C. postures D. means Question 15: A. what B. which C. that D. who Question 16: A. with B. without C. and D. including Question 17: A. minutes B. hours C. years D. months Question 18: A. expression B. movement C. understanding D. meaning Question 19: A. benefit B. favour C. disadvantage D. advantage Question 20: CA. or B. and C. but D. with Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Long before they can actually speak, babies pay special attention to the speech they hear around them. Within the first month of their lives, babies' responses to the sound of the human voice will be different from their responses to other sorts of auditory stimuli. They will stop crying when they hear a person talking, but not if they hear a bell or the sound of a rattle. At first, the sounds that an infant notices might be only those words that receive the heaviest emphasis and that often occur at the ends of utterances. By the time they are six or seven weeks old, babies can detect the difference between syllables pronounced with rising and falling inflections. Very soon, these differences in adult stress and intonation can influence babies' emotional states and behavior. Long before they develop actual language comprehension, babies can sense when an adult is playful or angry, attempting to initiate or terminate new behavior, and so on, merely on the basis of cues such as the rate, volume, and melody of adult speech. Adults make it as easy as they can for babies to pick up a language by exaggerating such cues. One researcher observed babies and their mothers in six diverse cultures and found that, in all six languages, the mothers used simplified syntax, short utterances and nonsense sounds, and transformed certain sounds into baby talk. Other investigators have noted that when mothers talk to babies who are only a few months old, they exaggerate the pitch, loudness, and intensity of their words. They also exaggerate their facial expressions, hold vowels longer, and emphasize certain words. More significant for language development than their response to general intonation is observation that tiny babies can make relatively fine distinctions between speech sounds. In other words, babies enter the world with the ability to make precisely those perceptual discriminations that are necessary if they are to acquire aural language. Babies obviously derive pleasure from sound input, too: even as young as nine months they will listen to songs or stories, although the words themselves are beyond their understanding. For babies, language is a sensory-motor delight rather than the route to prosaic meaning that it often is for adults. Question 21: The word "diverse" is closest in meaning to ______________. A. surrounding B. stimulating C. divided D. different Mã đề 194 3/7 Question 22: The word "They" refers to ______________. A. words B. mothers C. investigators D. babies Question 23: Why does the author mention "a bell and a rattle"? A. To give examples of typical toys that babies do not like B. To contrast the reactions of babies to human and nonhuman sounds C. To give examples of sounds that will cause a baby to cry D. To explain how babies distinguish between different nonhuman sounds Question 24: What does the passage mainly discuss? A. How babies differentiate between the sound of the human voice and other sounds B. The differences between a baby's and an adult's ability to comprehend language C. How babies perceive and respond to the human voice in their earliest stages of language development D. The response of babies to sounds other than the human voice Question 25: The word "emphasize" is closest in meaning to ______________. A. repeat B. stress C. leave out D. explain Question 26: What point does the author make to illustrate that babies are born with the ability to acquire language? A. Babies begin to understand words in songs. B. Babies are more sensitive to sounds than are adults. C. Babies notice even minor differences between speech sounds. D. Babies exaggerate their own sounds and expressions. Question 27: The word "noted" is closest in meaning to______________. A. observed B. requested C. disagreed D. theorized Question 28: Which of the following can be inferred about the findings described in paragraph 2? A. Babies who are exposed to more than one language can speak earlier than babies exposed to a single language. B. The mothers observed by the researchers were consciously teaching their babies to speak. C. Babies ignore facial expressions in comprehending aural language. D. Mothers from different cultures speak to their babies in similar ways. Question 29: According to the author, why do babies listen to songs and stories, even though they cannot understand them? A. They focus on the meaning of their parents' word. B. They understand the rhythm. C. They enjoy the sound. D. They can remember them easily Question 30: The passage mentions all of the followings as the ways adults modify their speech when talking to babies EXCEPT ______________. A. speaking more loudly than normal B. giving all words equal emphasis C. speaking with shorter sentences D. using meaningless sounds Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to show the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 31: Establishing in 1984 for students who wanted to study art and music subjects, A B LaGuardia was the first public school of its kind. C D Mã đề 194 4/7 Question 32: The old woman cannot remember the place which she kept her savings A B C D Question 33: I think she will be suitable for the work because she has been working like a teacher for a long time. A B C D Question 34: The abilities to work hard, follow directions, and thinking independently are some of the A B C criteria for success in the workplace. D Question 35: The longest mountain range, the Mid-Atlantic Range, is not hardly visible because A B most of it lies under the ocean. C D Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 36: A. understand B. expedition C. electronic D. insurance Question 37: A. achievement B. technology C. economics D. dependent Question 38: A. endangered B. necessary C. humidity D. incredible Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Question 39: A. wicked B. knocked C. helped D. coughed Question 40: A. resort B. position C. pleasure D. desert Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 41: A: I think it is a good idea to have three or four generations living under one roof. B: _________ Family members can help each other a lot. A. It's not true. B. That's wrong. C. I couldn't agree any more. D. I don't agree. Question 42: Ann: How well you are playing, Peter! Peter: _________. A. Many thanks, that's a nice compliment B. Say it again. I like to hear your words C. Thank you too much D. I think so. I'm proud of myself Question 43: The teacher as well as his students____________ at the school meeting yet. A. haven’t arrived B. not arriving C. arrived D. hasn’t arrived Question 44: "Why wasn't your boyfriend at the party last night?" - "He ______ the lecture at Shaw Hall. I know he very much wanted to hear the speaker." A. should have attended B. was to attend C. may have attended D. can have attended Question 45: “We’d better __________ if we want to get there in time” A. take up B. put down C. turn down D. speed up Question 46: Nowadays, most students use _______ calculators in their studies and examinations A. electronic B. electricity C. electric D. electrical Question 47: The last person _____ will have to turn off the lights. A. have left B. to leave C. left D. leaving Mã đề 194 5/7 Question 48: It is essential that Alice __________ about his responsibilities in the meeting tomorrow. A. will be reminded B. will remind C. be reminded D. must remind Question 49: The use of computers aids in teaching, __________ the role of teachers is still very important. A. although B. yet C. so that D. because Question 50: _____ that Marie was able to retire at the age of 50. A. Her business was successful B. So successful her business was, C. So successful was her business D. So was her successful business, Question 51: - “Can I carry these suitcases into the room for you?” - “______” A. No, you can’t. B. Yes, you can. C. Can you? That’s very kind. D. You can’t, I think! Question 52: My mother ______ me against staying late night after night to prepare for exams. A. recommended B. reprimanded C. encouraged D. warned Question 53: She must have been sleepless last night. Otherwise, her eyes _______ so bloody now. A. looked B. wouldn’t look C. wouldn’t have looked D. won’t look Question 54: I’ve never really enjoyed going to the ballet or the opera; they’re not really my ______ A. cup of tea B. piece of cake C. chip off the old block D. biscuit Question 55: After we each had been assigned an installment part of the project, we came back to our _______ section. A. irrespective B. respective C. respectively D. respectful Question 56: Before you start cooking, you should gather together all the necessary _________ A. substances B. elements C. factors D. ingredients Question 57: This shirt is ______ that one. A. as much expensive as B. not nearly as expensive as C. much far expensive than D. a bit less expensive Question 58: My friend bought ___________ from a shop on Tran Phu street. A. a leather brown nice belt B. a nice leather brown belt C. a nice brown leather belt D. a brown nice leather belt Question 59: The new manager found the situation so complicated that he couldn’t see the wood for the _________ A. leaf B. fruit C. wood D. trees Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) SIMILAR in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 60: I think we can safely say now that we have got our money back, we are home and dry. A. have got no water B. have got home dry C. have been successful D have not got wet Question 61: Roget's Thesaurus, a collection of English words and phrases, was originally arranged by the ideas they express rather than by alphabetical order. A. unless B. instead of C. restricted D. as well as Question 62: Within a week on display at the exhibition, the painting was hailed as a masterpiece. A. an excellent work of art B. a large work of art C. a down- to –earth work of art D. an expensive work of art Mã đề 194 6/7 Question 63: Deer like figures made from willow shoots are the oldest evidence of human habitation in the Grand Canyon. A. dispute B. exhibit C. proof D. clue Question 64: He drives me to the edge because he never stops talking. A. moves me B. steers me C. irritates me D. frightens me WRITING Part I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Question 65: He was very sorry that he didn't see Andrey on her trip to London. He greatly regretted ______________________________________ Question 66: The plane had hardly left the airport when the accident happened. No sooner _______________________________________________ Question 67: Although she said that she would come, I don’t think she ever will. Despite _________________________________________ Question 68: Most people think Nigel is the best racing driver in the world. Nigel is considered _____________________________________ Question 69: “Unless I receive her letter tomorrow, I’ll phone her,” said Nam Nam said that if ______________________________________ Part II: In about 140 words, write a paragraph about the importance of family in your life. The following prompt might be helpful to you. - supporting us - sharing feelings, secrets, problems … - helping us improve our personality ------------- THE END --------------- Mã đề 194 7/7 SỞ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO BẮC NINH ĐỀ THI THỬ THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN I TRƯỜNG THPT LÝ THÁI TỔ MÔN TIẾNG ANH Ngày thi : 8/11/2015 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Đề thi gồm 7 trang) M· ®Ò thi: 258 Họ, tên thí sinh: …………………………………………….. Lớp: ………… Số báo danh: ……… Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) SIMILAR in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 1: Roget's Thesaurus, a collection of English words and phrases, was originally arranged by the ideas they express rather than by alphabetical order. A. restricted B. instead of C. unless D. as well as Question 2: Within a week on display at the exhibition, the painting was hailed as a masterpiece. A. an excellent work of art B. an expensive work of art C. a down- to –earth work of art D. a large work of art Question 3: Deer like figures made from willow shoots are the oldest evidence of human habitation in the Grand Canyon. A. proof B. dispute C. exhibit D. clue Question 4: He drives me to the edge because he never stops talking. A. irritates me B. frightens me C. moves me D. steers me Question 5: I think we can safely say now that we have got our money back, we are home and dry. A. have not got wet B. have been successful C. have got no water D. have got home dry Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions Question 6: It is essential that Alice __________ about his responsibilities in the meeting tomorrow. A. must remind B. be reminded C. will remind D. will be reminded Question 7: The use of computers aids in teaching, __________ the role of teachers is still very important. A. yet B. although C. because D. so that Question 8: _____ that Marie was able to retire at the age of 50. A. So successful her business was B. So was her successful business, C. Her business was successful D. So successful was her business, Question 9: - “Can I carry these suitcases into the room for you?” - “______” A. Can you? That’s very kind. B. You can’t, I think! C. No, you can’t. D. Yes, you can. Question 10: My mother ______ me against staying late night after night to prepare for exams. A. encouraged B. warned C. recommended D. reprimanded Question 11: She must have been sleepless last night. Otherwise, her eyes _______ so bloody now. A. wouldn’t look B. looked C. won’t look D. wouldn’t have looked Mã đề 258 1/7 Question 12: I’ve never really enjoyed going to the ballet or the opera; they’re not really my ______ A. piece of cake B. chip off the old block C. cup of tea D. biscuits Question 13: After we each had been assigned an installment part of the project, we came back to our _______ section. A. respectively B. respective C. respectful D. irrespective Question 14: Before you start cooking, you should gather together all the necessary _________ A. factors B. elements C. substances D. ingredients Question 15: The last person _____ will have to turn off the lights. A. to leave B. have left C. leaving D. left Question 16: This shirt is ______ that one. A. much far expensive than B. a bit less expensive C. as much expensive as D. not nearly as expensive as Question 17: My friend bought ___________ from a shop on Tran Phu street. A. a leather brown nice belt B. a brown nice leather belt C. a nice brown leather belt D. a nice leather brown belt Question 18: The new manager found the situation so complicated that he couldn’t see the wood for the _________ A. tree B. wood C. leaf D. fruit Question 19: A: I think it is a good idea to have three or four generations living under one roof. B: _________ Family members can help each other a lot. A. That's wrong. B. I couldn't agree any more. C. I don't agree. D. It's not true. Question 20: Ann: How well you are playing, Peter! Peter: _________. A. Say it again. I like to hear your words B. Many thanks, that's a nice compliment C. Thank you too much D. I think so. I'm proud of myself Question 21: The teacher as well as his students____________ at the school meeting yet. A. not arriving B. arrived C. haven’t arrived D. hasn’t arrived Question 22: "Why wasn't your boyfriend at the party last night?" - "He ______ the lecture at Shaw Hall. I know he very much wanted to hear the speaker." A. was to attend B. may have attended C. should have attended D. can have attended Question 23: “We’d better __________ if we want to get there in time” A. speed up B. turn down C. take up D. put down Question 24: Nowadays, most students use _______ calculators in their studies and examinations A. electricity B. electronic C. electric D. electrical Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions Throughout history people have always communicated with one another, not only by speech but also by movements of the hands and body. It is, however, only (35) ______ the last few years that these aspects of communication have been studied at all widely. This type of communication is known as body language or non-verbal communication. Mã đề 258 2/7 People sometimes wonder (36) ______ you can learn how body language works. It is of course possible to read books on the subject but you also need to (37) ______ time observing people’s movements. A railway station is a particular good place for such observation, as here people can be seen openly expressing eagerness, sorrow, delight, impatience and many other human emotions by (38) _____ of movement. If you turn down the sound on your television set and try to understand (39) _____ is happening simply by watching the picture you will learn even more about communication (40) _____ words. By turning the sound back up every five (41) ______ or so, it is possible to check how accurate your (42) ______ is. Having studied the art of body language you will have a definite (43) ______ at a boring party. You will be able to sit on your own for the whole evening and thoroughly enjoy yourself by both watching (44) ______ interpreting the body language of all the other people there. Question 25: A. for B. during C. with D. on Question 26: A. whether B. what C. that D. how Question 27: A. kill B. give C. spend D. lose Question 28: A. health B. postures C. means D. gestures Question 29: A. which B. who C. that D. what Question 30: A. without B. and C. including D. with Question 31: A. minutes B. hours C. months D. years Question 32: A. movement B. meaning C. expression D. understanding Question 33: A. disadvantage B. advantage C. benefit D. favour Question 34: A. and B. but C. or D. with Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the question below. We find that bright children are rarely held back by mixed-ability teaching. On the contrary, both their knowledge and experience are enriched. We feel that there are many disadvantages in streaming pupils. It does not take into account the fact that children develop at different rates. It can have a bad effect on both the bright and the not-so-bright child. After all, it can be quite discouraging to be at the bottom of the top grade! Besides, it is rather unreal to grade people just according to their intellectual ability. This is only one aspect of their total personality. We are concerned to develop the abilities of all our pupils to the full, not just their academic ability. We also value personal qualities and social skills, and we find that mixed- ability teaching contributes to all these aspects of learning. In our classroom, we work in various ways. The pupils often work in groups; this gives them the opportunity to learn to co-operate, to share, and to develop leadership skills. They also learn how to cope with the personal problems as well as learning how to think, to make decisions, to analyze and evaluate, to communicate effectively. The pupils learn from each other as well as from the teachers. Sometimes the pupils work in pairs; sometimes the work on individual tasks and assignments, they can do this at their own speed. They also have some formal class teaching when this is appropriate. We encourage our pupils to use the library, and we teach them the skills they need in order to do this effectively. An advanced pupil can do advanced works; it does not matter what age the child is. We expect our pupils to do their best, not their least, and we give them every encouragement to attain this goal. Question 35: The phrase “held back” in paragraph 1 means ______ A. forced to study in lower class B. made to remain in the same class C. prevented from advancing D. made to lag behind Mã đề 258 3/7 Question 36: The author argues that a teacher’s chief concern should be the development of the pupils’ _________ A. total personality B. intellectual abilities C. personal and social skills D. learning ability and communicative skills Question 37: Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage? A. Group work gives pupils the opportunity to learn to work together with others B. Pupils also learn how to participate in teaching activities C. Group work provides the pupils with the opportunity to learn to be capable organizers D. Pupils also learn to develop their reasoning ability Question 38: The author’s purpose of writing this passage is to _________ A. recommend pair work and group work classroom activities B. emphasize the importance of appropriate formal classroom teaching C. offer advice on the proper use of the school library D. argue for teaching bright and not-so-bright pupils in the same class. Question 39: In the passage, the author’s attitude towards “mixed-ability teaching” is ________ A. critical B. questioning C. approving D. objective Question 40: According to the passage, which of the following is NOT true? A. It’s not good for a bright child to find out that he performs worst in a mixed-ability class B. Development of pupils as individuals is not the aim of group work C. Pupils cannot develop in the best way if they are streamed into classes of different intellectual abilities D. There is no fixed method in teaching pupils to develop themselves to the full Question 41: According to the passage, which of the following is an advantage of mixed-ability teaching? A. Formal class teaching is the important way to give pupils essential skills such as those to be used in the library. B. Pupils can be hindered from an all-round development C. A pupil can be at the bottom of a class D. Pupils as individuals always have the opportunities to work on their own. Question 42: Which of the following statements can best summarize the main idea of the passage? A. Various ways of teaching should be encouraged in class B. Bright children do benefit from mixed-ability teaching C. The aim of education is to find out how to teach the bright and not-so-bright pupils D. Children, in general, develop at different rates Question 43: According to the passage, “streaming pupils” ______ A. aims at enriching both their knowledge and experience B. is the act of putting pupils into class according to their academic abilities C. is quite discouraging D. will help the pupils learn best Question 44: According to the author, mixed-ability teaching is more preferable because _______ A. formal class teaching is appropriate B. it doesn’t have disadvantages as in streaming pupils Mã đề 258 4/7 C. children can learn to work with each other to solve personal problems D. its aim at developing the children’s total personality Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Long before they can actually speak, babies pay special attention to the speech they hear around them. Within the first month of their lives, babies' responses to the sound of the human voice will be different from their responses to other sorts of auditory stimuli. They will stop crying when they hear a person talking, but not if they hear a bell or the sound of a rattle. At first, the sounds that an infant notices might be only those words that receive the heaviest emphasis and that often occur at the ends of utterances. By the time they are six or seven weeks old, babies can detect the difference between syllables pronounced with rising and falling inflections. Very soon, these differences in adult stress and intonation can influence babies' emotional states and behavior. Long before they develop actual language comprehension, babies can sense when an adult is playful or angry, attempting to initiate or terminate new behavior, and so on, merely on the basis of cues such as the rate, volume, and melody of adult speech. Adults make it as easy as they can for babies to pick up a language by exaggerating such cues. One researcher observed babies and their mothers in six diverse cultures and found that, in all six languages, the mothers used simplified syntax, short utterances and nonsense sounds, and transformed certain sounds into baby talk. Other investigators have noted that when mothers talk to babies who are only a few months old, they exaggerate the pitch, loudness, and intensity of their words. They also exaggerate their facial expressions, hold vowels longer, and emphasize certain words. More significant for language development than their response to general intonation is observation that tiny babies can make relatively fine distinctions between speech sounds. In other words, babies enter the world with the ability to make precisely those perceptual discriminations that are necessary if they are to acquire aural language. Babies obviously derive pleasure from sound input, too: even as young as nine months they will listen to songs or stories, although the words themselves are beyond their understanding. For babies, language is a sensory-motor delight rather than the route to prosaic meaning that it often is for adults. Question 45: The passage mentions all of the followings as the ways adults modify their speech when talking to babies EXCEPT ______________. A. giving all words equal emphasis B. speaking with shorter sentences C. speaking more loudly than normal D. using meaningless sounds Question 46: The word "diverse" is closest in meaning to ______________. A. stimulating B. divided C. surrounding D. different Question 47: The word "They" refers to ______________. A. words B. investigators C. mothers D. babies Question 48: Why does the author mention "a bell and a rattle"? A. To give examples of typical toys that babies do not like B. To explain how babies distinguish between different nonhuman sounds C. To contrast the reactions of babies to human and nonhuman sounds D. To give examples of sounds that will cause a baby to cry Question 49: What does the passage mainly discuss? A. How babies perceive and respond to the human voice in their earliest stages of language development B. How babies differentiate between the sound of the human voice and other sounds Mã đề 258 5/7 C. The differences between a baby's and an adult's ability to comprehend language D. The response of babies to sounds other than the human voice Question 50: The word "emphasize" is closest in meaning to ______________. A. leave out B. stress C. repeat D. explain Question 51: What point does the author make to illustrate that babies are born with the ability to acquire language? A. Babies begin to understand words in songs. B. Babies exaggerate their own sounds and expressions. C. Babies notice even minor differences between speech sounds. D. Babies are more sensitive to sounds than are adults. Question 52: The word "noted" is closest in meaning to______________. A. requested B. disagreed C. theorized D. observed Question 53: Which of the following can be inferred about the findings described in paragraph 2? A. The mothers observed by the researchers were consciously teaching their babies to speak. B. Mothers from different cultures speak to their babies in similar ways. C. Babies ignore facial expressions in comprehending aural language. D. Babies who are exposed to more than one language can speak earlier than babies exposed to a single language. Question 54: According to the author, why do babies listen to songs and stories, even though they cannot understand them? A. They can remember them easily. B. They focus on the meaning of their parents' word. C. They understand the rhythm. D. They enjoy the sound. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Question 55: A. resort B. desert C. pleasure D. position Question 56: A. knocked B. helped C. coughed D. wicked Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 57: A. endangered B. necessary C. humidity D. incredible Question 58: A. electronic B. expedition C. understand D. insurance Question 59: A. economics B. technology C. achievement D. dependent Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to show the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 60: The old woman cannot remember the place which she kept her savings A B C D Question 61: I think she will be suitable for the work because she has been working like a teacher for a long time. A B C D Question 62: The abilities to work hard, follow directions, and thinking independently are some of the A B C criteria for success in the workplace. D Mã đề 258 6/7 Question 63: The longest mountain range, the Mid-Atlantic Range, is not hardly visible because A B most of it lies under the ocean. C D Question 64: Establishing in 1984 for students who wanted to study art and music subjects, A B LaGuardia was the first public school of its kind. C D WRITING Part I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Question 65: He was very sorry that he didn't see Andrey on her trip to London. He greatly regretted ______________________________________ Question 66: The plane had hardly left the airport when the accident happened. No sooner _______________________________________________ Question 67: Although she said that she would come, I don’t think she ever will. Despite _________________________________________ Question 68: Most people think Nigel is the best racing driver in the world. Nigel is considered _____________________________________ Question 69: “Unless I receive her letter tomorrow, I’ll phone her,” said Nam Nam said that if ______________________________________ Part II: In about 140 words, write a paragraph about the importance of family in your life The following prompts might be helpful to you. - supporting us - sharing feelings, secrets, problems … - helping us improve our personality ---------------- THE END ---------------- Mã đề 258 7/7 SỞ GIÁO DỤC VÀ ĐÀO TẠO BẮC NINH ĐỀ THI THỬ THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN I TRƯỜNG THPT LÝ THÁI TỔ MÔN TIẾNG ANH Ngày thi : 8/11/2015 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Đề thi gồm 7 trang) M· ®Ò thi: 457 Hä, tªn thÝ sinh: …………………………….. Líp: ………… Sè b¸o danh: ……… Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Question 1: A. pleasure B. desert C. resort D. position Question 2: A. knocked B. helped C. wicked D. coughed Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 3: A. technology B. economics C. achievement D. dependent Question 4: A. necessary B. endangered C. humidity D. incredible Question 5: A. electronic B. insurance C. understand D. expedition Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 6: The last person _____ will have to turn off the lights. A. leaving B. have left C. to leave D. left Question 7: This shirt is ______ that one. A. much far expensive than B. a bit less expensive C. as much expensive as D. not nearly as expensive as Question 8: My friend bought ___________ from a shop on Tran Phu street. A. a nice brown leather belt B. a brown nice leather belt C. a leather brown nice belt D. a nice leather brown belt Question 9: The new manager found the situation so complicated that he couldn’t see the wood for the _________ A. wood B. trees C. leaf D. fruit Question 10: A: I think it is a good idea to have three or four generations living under one roof. B: _________ Family members can help each other a lot. A. That's wrong. B. I couldn't agree any more. C. I don't agree. D. It's not true. Question 11: Ann: How well you are playing, Peter! Peter: _________. A. Say it again. I like to hear your words B. Thank you too much C. Many thanks, that's a nice compliment D. I think so. I'm proud of myself Question 12: The teacher as well as his students____________ at the school meeting yet. A. not arriving B. arrived C. hasn’t arrived D. haven’t arrived Question 13: "Why wasn't your boyfriend at the party last night?" - "He ______ the lecture at Shaw Hall. I know he very much wanted to hear the speaker." A. was to attend B. may have attended C. should have attended D. can have attended Mã đề 457 1/7 Question 14: “We’d better __________ if we want to get there in time” A. turn down B. speed up C. take up D. put down Question 15: Nowadays, most students use _______ calculators in their studies and examinations A. electricity B. electric C. electronic D. electrical Question 16: It is essential that Alice __________ about his responsibilities in the meeting tomorrow. A. must remind B. will be reminded C. will remind D. be reminded Question 17: The use of computers aids in teaching, __________ the role of teachers is still very important. A. because B. although C. yet D. so that Question 18: _____ that Marie was able to retire at the age of 50. A. So successful was her business B. So was her successful business, C. Her business was successful D. So successful her business was, Question 19: - “Can I carry these suitcases into the room for you?” - “______” A. Can you? That’s very kind. B. You can’t, I think! C. No, you can’t. D. Yes, you can. Question 20: My mother ______ me against staying late night after night to prepare for exams. A. encouraged B. warned C. recommended D. reprimanded Question 21: She must have been sleepless last night. Otherwise, her eyes _______ so bloody now. A. won’t look B. looked C. wouldn’t look D. wouldn’t have looked Question 22: I’ve never really enjoyed going to the ballet or the opera; they’re not really my ______ A. piece of cake B. chip off the old block C. biscuit D. cup of tea Question 23: After we each had been assigned an installment part of the project, we came back to our _______ section. A. respective B. respectively C. respectful D. irrespective Question 24: Before you start cooking, you should gather together all the necessary _________ A. factors B. ingredients C. substances D. elements Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) SIMILAR in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 25: Deer like figures made from willow shoots are the oldest evidence of human habitation in the Grand Canyon. A. clue B. dispute C. exhibit D. proof Question 26: He drives me to the edge because he never stops talking. A. irritates me B. frightens me C. moves me D. steers me Question 27: I think we can safely say now that we have got our money back, we are home and dry. A. have been successful B. have not got wet C. have got no water D. have got home dry Question 28: Roget's Thesaurus, a collection of English words and phrases, was originally arranged by the ideas they express rather than by alphabetical order. A. restricted B. as well as C. unless D. instead of Question 29: Within a week on display at the exhibition, the painting was hailed as a masterpiece. A. a down- to –earth work of art B. an expensive work of art C. an excellent work of art D. a large work of art Mã đề 457 2/7 Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to show the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 30: The abilities to work hard, follow directions, and thinking independently are some of the A B C criteria for success in the workplace. D Question 31: The longest mountain range, the Mid-Atlantic Range, is not hardly visible because A B most of it lies under the ocean. C D Question 32: Establishing in 1984 for students who wanted to study art and music subjects, A B LaGuardia was the first public school of its kind. C D Question 33: The old woman cannot remember the place which she kept her savings A B C D Question 34: I think she will be suitable for the work because she has been working like a teacher for a long time. A B C D Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions Throughout history people have always communicated with one another, not only by speech but also by movements of the hands and body. It is, however, only (35) ______ the last few years that these aspects of communication have been studied at all widely. This type of communication is known as body language or non-verbal communication. People sometimes wonder (36) ______ you can learn how body language works. It is of course possible to read books on the subject but you also need to (37) ______ time observing people’s movements. A railway station is a particular good place for such observation, as here people can be seen openly expressing eagerness, sorrow, delight, impatience and many other human emotions by (38) _____ of movement. If you turn down the sound on your television set and try to understand (39) _____ is happening simply by watching the picture you will learn even more about communication (40) _____ words. By turning the sound back up every five (41) ______ or so, it is possible to check how accurate your (42) ______ is. Having studied the art of body language you will have a definite (43) ______ at a boring party. You will be able to sit on your own for the whole evening and thoroughly enjoy yourself by both watching (44) ______ interpreting the body language of all the other people there. Question 35: A. for B. on C. with D. during Question 36: A. that B. what C. whether D. how Question 37: A. spend B. give C. kill D. lose Question 38: A. health B. postures C. means D. gestures Question 39: A. which B. what C. that D. who Question 40: A. with B. and C. including D. without Question 41: A. minutes B. hours C. months D. years Question 42: A. understanding B. meaning C. expression D. movement Mã đề 457 3/7 Question 43: A. disadvantage B. advantage C. benefit D. favour Question 44: A. and B. but C. or D. with Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the question below. We find that bright children are rarely held back by mixed-ability teaching. On the contrary, both their knowledge and experience are enriched. We feel that there are many disadvantages in streaming pupils. It does not take into account the fact that children develop at different rates. It can have a bad effect on both the bright and the not-so-bright child. After all, it can be quite discouraging to be at the bottom of the top grade! Besides, it is rather unreal to grade people just according to their intellectual ability. This is only one aspect of their total personality. We are concerned to develop the abilities of all our pupils to the full, not just their academic ability. We also value personal qualities and social skills, and we find that mixed-ability teaching contributes to all these aspects of learning. In our classroom, we work in various ways. The pupils often work in groups; this gives them the opportunity to learn to co-operate, to share, and to develop leadership skills. They also learn how to cope with the personal problems as well as learning how to think, to make decisions, to analyze and evaluate, to communicate effectively. The pupils learn from each other as well as from the teachers. Sometimes the pupils work in pairs; sometimes the work on individual tasks and assignments, they can do this at their own speed. They also have some formal class teaching when this is appropriate. We encourage our pupils to use the library, and we teach them the skills they need in order to do this effectively. An advanced pupil can do advanced works; it does not matter what age the child is. We expect our pupils to do their best, not their least, and we give them every encouragement to attain this goal. Question 45: In the passage, the author’s attitude towards “mixed-ability teaching” is ________ A. critical B. questioning C. approving D. objective Question 46: The phrase “held back” in paragraph 1 means ______ A. forced to study in lower class B. prevented from advancing C. made to remain in the same classes D. made to lag behind Question 47: The author argues that a teacher’s chief concern should be the development of the pupils’ _________ A. learning ability and communicative skills B. intellectual abilities C. personal and social skills D. total personality Question 48: Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage? A. Pupils also learn how to participate in teaching activities B. Group work gives pupils the opportunity to learn to work together with others C. Group work provides the pupils with the opportunity to learn to be capable organizers D. Pupils also learn to develop their reasoning ability Question 49: The author’s purpose of writing this passage is to _________ A. recommend pair work and group work classroom activities B. emphasize the importance of appropriate formal classroom teaching C. offer advice on the proper use of the school library D. argue for teaching bright and not-so-bright pupils in the same class. Question 50: According to the passage, which of the following is NOT true? A. It’s not good for a bright child to find out that he performs worst in a mixed-ability class Mã đề 457 4/7 B. Development of pupils as individuals is not the aim of group work C. Pupils cannot develop in the best way if they are streamed into classes of different intellectual abilities D. There is no fixed method in teaching pupils to develop themselves to the full Question 51: According to the passage, which of the following is an advantage of mixed-ability teaching? A. Formal class teaching is the important way to give pupils essential skills such as those to be used in the library. B. Pupils can be hindered from an all-round development C. Pupils as individuals always have the opportunities to work on their own. D. A pupil can be at the bottom of a class Question 52: Which of the following statements can best summarize the main idea of the passage? A. Children, in general, develop at different rates B. Bright children do benefit from mixed-ability teaching C. The aim of education is to find out how to teach the bright and not-so-bright pupils D. Various ways of teaching should be encouraged in class Question 53: According to the passage, “streaming pupils” ______ A. is the act of putting pupils into class according to their academic abilities B. aims at enriching both their knowledge and experience C. is quite discouraging D. will help the pupils learn best Question 54: According to the author, mixed-ability teaching is more preferable because _______ A. formal class teaching is appropriate B. its aim at developing the children’s total personality C. children can learn to work with each other to solve personal problems D. it doesn’t have disadvantages as in streaming pupils Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Long before they can actually speak, babies pay special attention to the speech they hear around them. Within the first month of their lives, babies' responses to the sound of the human voice will be different from their responses to other sorts of auditory stimuli. They will stop crying when they hear a person talking, but not if they hear a bell or the sound of a rattle. At first, the sounds that an infant notices might be only those words that receive the heaviest emphasis and that often occur at the ends of utterances. By the time they are six or seven weeks old, babies can detect the difference between syllables pronounced with rising and falling inflections. Very soon, these differences in adult stress and intonation can influence babies' emotional states and behavior. Long before they develop actual language comprehension, babies can sense when an adult is playful or angry, attempting to initiate or terminate new behavior, and so on, merely on the basis of cues such as the rate, volume, and melody of adult speech. Adults make it as easy as they can for babies to pick up a language by exaggerating such cues. One researcher observed babies and their mothers in six diverse cultures and found that, in all six languages, the mothers used simplified syntax, short utterances and nonsense sounds, and transformed certain sounds into baby talk. Other investigators have noted that when mothers talk to babies who are only a few months old, they exaggerate the pitch, loudness, and intensity of their words. They also exaggerate their facial expressions, hold vowels longer, and emphasize certain words. Mã đề 457 5/7 More significant for language development than their response to general intonation is observation that tiny babies can make relatively fine distinctions between speech sounds. In other words, babies enter the world with the ability to make precisely those perceptual discriminations that are necessary if they are to acquire aural language. Babies obviously derive pleasure from sound input, too: even as young as nine months they will listen to songs or stories, although the words themselves are beyond their understanding. For babies, language is a sensory-motor delight rather than the route to prosaic meaning that it often is for adults. Question 55: Which of the following can be inferred about the findings described in paragraph 2? A. The mothers observed by the researchers were consciously teaching their babies to speak. B. Babies ignore facial expressions in comprehending aural language. C. Mothers from different cultures speak to their babies in similar ways. D. Babies who are exposed to more than one language can speak earlier than babies exposed to a single language. Question 56: According to the author, why do babies listen to songs and stories, even though they cannot understand them? A. They can remember them easily. B. They focus on the meaning of their parents' word. C. They understand the rhythm. D. They enjoy the sound. Question 57: The passage mentions all of the followings as the ways adults modify their speech when talking to babies EXCEPT ______________. A. speaking more loudly than normal B. speaking with shorter sentences C. giving all words equal emphasis D. using meaningless sounds Question 58: The word "diverse" is closest in meaning to ______________. A. stimulating B. divided C. different D. surrounding Question 59: The word "They" refers to ______________. A. mothers B. investigators C. words D. babies Question 60: Why does the author mention "a bell and a rattle"? A. To give examples of typical toys that babies do not like B. To explain how babies distinguish between different nonhuman sounds C. To contrast the reactions of babies to human and nonhuman sounds D. To give examples of sounds that will cause a baby to cry Question 61: What does the passage mainly discuss? A. The response of babies to sounds other than the human voice B. How babies differentiate between the sound of the human voice and other sounds C. The differences between a baby's and an adult's ability to comprehend language D. How babies perceive and respond to the human voice in their earliest stages of language development Question 62: The word "emphasize" is closest in meaning to ______________. A. leave out B. explain C. repeat D. stress Question 63: What point does the author make to illustrate that babies are born with the ability to acquire language? A. Babies notice even minor differences between speech sounds. B. Babies exaggerate their own sounds and expressions. C. Babies begin to understand words in songs. D. Babies are more sensitive to sounds than are adults. Mã đề 457 6/7 Question 64: The word "noted" is closest in meaning to______________. A. requested B. disagreed C. observed D. theorized WRITING Part I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Question 65: He was very sorry that he didn't see Andrey on her trip to London. He greatly regretted ______________________________________ Question 66: The plane had hardly left the airport when the accident happened. No sooner _______________________________________________ Question 67: Although she said that she would come, I don’t think she ever will. Despite _________________________________________ Question 68: Most people think Nigel is the best racing driver in the world. Nigel is considered _____________________________________ Question 69: “Unless I receive her letter tomorrow, I’ll phone her,” said Nam Nam said that if ______________________________________ Part II: In about 140 words, write a paragraph about the importance of family in your life. The following prompts might be helpful to you. - supporting us - sharing feelings, secrets, problems … - helping us improve our personality --------------- THE END --------------- Mã đề 457 7/7 Đáp án PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM (8 điểm) Mã đề 457 Câu số Đáp án Câu số Đáp án Câu số Đáp án 1 A 30 B 2 C 31 B 3 B 32 A 4 A 33 C 5 B 34 D 6 C 35 D 7 D 36 C 8 A 37 A 9 B 38 C 10 B 39 B 11 C 40 D 12 C 41 D 13 B 42 A 14 B 43 B 15 C 44 A 59 A 16 D 45 C 60 C 17 C 46 B 61 D 18 A 47 D 62 D 19 A 48 A 63 A 20 B 49 D 64 C 21 C 50 C 22 D 51 C 23 A 52 D 24 B 53 A 25 D 54 B 26 A 55 C 27 A 56 D 28 D 57 C 29 C 58 C Mã đề 132 Câu số Đáp án Câu số Đáp án Câu số Đáp án 1 B 23 B 45 A 2 D 24 B 46 C 3 C 25 C 47 C 4 B 26 B 48 A 5 C 27 B 49 B 6 D 28 A 50 D 7 C 29 B 51 B 8 D 30 C 52 B 9 C 31 D 53 C 10 B 32 B 54 B 11 D 33 A 55 A 12 C 34 C 56 B 13 D 35 B 57 A 14 B 36 C 58 B 15 A 37 B 59 A 16 C 38 B 60 C 17 D 39 B 61 B 18 A 40 A 62 B 19 B 41 D 63 A 20 B 42 B 64 D 21 A 43 D 22 C 44 B Mã đề 258 Câu số Đáp án Câu số Đáp án Câu số Đáp án 1 B 23 A 45 A 2 A 24 B 46 D 3 A 25 B 47 C 4 A 26 A 48 C 5 B 27 C 49 A 6 B 28 C 50 B 7 A 29 D 51 C 8 D 30 A 52 D 9 A 31 D 53 B 10 B 32 D 54 D 11 A 33 B 55 C 12 C 34 A 56 D 13 B 35 C 57 B 14 D 36 A 58 D 15 A 37 B 59 A 16 D 38 D 60 C 17 C 39 C 61 D 18 A 40 C 62 B 19 B 41 D 63 B 20 B 42 A 64 A 21 D 43 B 22 B 44 D Mã đề 194 Câu số Đáp án Câu số Đáp án Câu số Đáp án 1 D 23 B 45 B 2 A 24 C 46 A 3 B 25 B 47 B 4 C 26 C 48 C 5 C 27 B 49 B 6 A 28 D 50 C 7 D 29 C 51 C 8 A 30 B 52 D 9 B 31 A 53 B 10 C 32 C 54 A 11 A 33 D 55 B 12 D 34 B 56 D 13 B 35 B 57 B 14 D 36 D 58 C 15 A 37 C 59 D 16 B 38 B 60 C 17 C 39 A 61 B 18 C 40 C 62 A 19 D 41 C 63 C 20 B 42 A 64 C 21 D 43 D 22 B 44 C PHẦN VIẾT (2 điểm) I. (0,5 điểm) Question 65: He greatly regretted not seeing Andrey on her trip to London. Question 66: I No sooner had the plane left the airport than the accident happened. Question 67: Despite her saying that she would come, I don’t think she ever will. Hoặc Despite the fact that she said that she would come, I don’t think she ever will. Question 68: Nigel is considered to be the the best racing driver in the world. Question 69: Nam said that if he didn’t receive her letter the next day/ the following day/ the day after, he would phone her. II. (1,5 điểm) Mô tả tiêu chí đánh giá Điểm tối đa 1. Bố cục 0,04 o Câu đề dẫn chủ đề mạch lạc o Bố cục hợp lí rõ ràng phù hợp yêu cầu của đề bài o Bố cục uyển chuyển từ mở bài đến kết luận 2. Phát triển ý 0,25 o Phát triển ý có trình tự logic o Có dẫn chứng, ví dụ, … đủ để bảo vệ ý kiến của mình 3. Sử dụng ngôn từ 0,30 o Sử dụng ngôn từ phù hợp nội dung o Sử dụng ngôn từ đúng văn phong/ thể loại o Sử dụng từ nối các ý cho bài viết uyển chuyển 4. Nội dung 0,30 o Đủ thuyết phục người đọc o Đủ dẫn chứng, ví dụ, lập luận o Độ dài: Số từ không nhiều hơn hoặc ít hơn so với quy định 5% 5. Ngữ pháp, dấu câu, và chính tả: 0,25 o Sử dụng đúng dấu câu o Chính tả: Viết đúng chính tả - Lỗi chính tả gây hiểu nhầm/ sai lệch ý sẽ bị tính một lỗi (trừ 1% điểm của bài viết) - Cùng một lỗi chính tả lặp lại chỉ tính là một lỗi o Sử dụng đúng thời, thể, cấu trúc câu đúng ngữ pháp. (Lỗi ngữ pháp gây hiểu nhầm/ sai lệch ý sẽ bị trừ 1% điểm bài viết.) Tổng 1,5 SỞ GD&ĐT BẮC NINH KỲ THI THỬ THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN 1 TRƯỜNG THPT HÀN THUYÊN NĂM HỌC 2015-2016 -------------------------------------------- (Đề có 05 trang) MÔN : Tiếng Anh LỚP : 12 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút, không kể thời gian phát đề Mã đề 169 Họ và tên thí sinh :............................................................... Số báo danh : ................... _________________________________________________________________________________ I. PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM ( 64 câu; 8 điểm ) Chọn từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác các từ còn lại : Câu 1: A. mastered B. gifted C. minded D. dedicated Câu 2: A. school B. each C. speech D. teacher Chọn từ có trọng âm nhấn vào âm tiết ở vị trí khác: Câu 3: A. prevention B. organism C. attraction D. engagement Câu 4: A. inhabit B. disappear C. imagine D. continue Câu 5: A. politician B. popularity C. laboratory D. documentary Chọn đáp án để hoàn thành câu: Câu 6: During the time I started to get chest pains, I ……… tennis a lot. A. was playing B. had played C. would play D. have played Câu 7: My computer is not ______ of running this software. A. suitable B. capable C. compatible D. able Câu 8: We object ___ your leaving dinner table to take calls. A. for B. on C. to D. with Câu 9: …………, he could not lift the trap door. A. As he was strong B. Strong as was he C. As strong he was D. Strong as he was Câu 10: When I was little, my father gave me some advice. He said ___ talk to strangers. A. don’t B. I shouldn’t C. that shouldn’t D. that I don’t Câu 11: Although ……. satisfied with the contract, the officials hesitatingly agreed to sign it. A. completion B. completely C. completed D. complete Câu 12: I think Japan ___ the World Cup one day. A. wins B. is winning C. is going to win D. will win Câu 13: He always complains about my ………………….to cook. A. inability B. unable C. ability D. able Câu 14: Is that a good mother who only cares about her ___? A. beauty B. beautiful C. beautify D. beautifully Câu 15: That hotel is so expensive. They ______ you sixty pounds for bed and breakfast. A. take B. cost C. charge D. fine Câu 16: Is this the address to ………………you want the package sent? A. where B. whose C. whom D. which Câu 17: I'm sure you'll have no ______ the exam. http://dethithu.net A. difficulty passing B. difficulties to pass C. difficulty to pass D. difficulties of passing Câu 18: - Janet: "Do you feel like going to the cinema this evening?" - Susan: "______." A. I don't agree, I'm afraid B. You’re welcome C. That would be great D. I feel very bored Trang 1/5 - Mã đề thi 169 Câu 19: My responsibility is to wash the dishes and ___ the garbage. A. take up B. get out C. get up D. take out Câu 20: It is necessary to be careful ……………your career. A. when you have chosen B. when you will choose C. when you chose D. when choosing Câu 21: “What a lovely hat you have!” - “Thanks ____.” A. That’s Ok B. I don’t care C. Certainly D. I’m glad you like it Câu 22: I am considering ______ my job. Can you recommend a good company? A. changing B. to change C. to move D. moving Câu 23: I didn’t know exactly how old he was, but he …..about 30 the first time we met. A. should be B. must have been C. should have been D. must be Câu 24: Since I came here, I ___ a lot of acquaintances. A. am having B. have C. have had D. had Câu 25: The train ___ when we arrived at the station. A. had left already B. has left already C. had already left D. was already leaving Câu 26: While I ___ TV last night, a mouse ran across the floor. A. was watching B. watched C. watch D. am watching ’ Câu 27: The most common way of attracting someone s attention from a distance is ___. A. smiling B. nodding C. waving D. handshaking Câu 28: ……… children were injured. They all came back unharmed. A. None of B. Not any of the C. None of the D. Not any of Câu 29: The room needs ______ for the wedding. A. decorating B. to decorate C. decorate D. be decorated Đọc bài văn, chọn đáp án điền vào chỗ trống: In this age of (30)______telephone networks and electronic mail, it seems that fewer and even fewer people are taking time to sit down and write letters (31)_____friends and relatives. For hundreds of years, letters were the only way to keep (32)_____ people who were any distance away and letter-writing was seen as an important skill for all learned people (33)______ . Gradually, (34)_____ , the importance of writing letters is decreasing to a point that majority of us have to (35)_____ a special effort to turn out something worthwhile when we apply for a job or make a complaint. In business circles the tendency is for routine communications to become shorter. (36)_____ clients may appreciate a detailed letter, an employee who sends out long letters is often regarded as (37)_____ . Many people prefer the telephone in all circumstances and its speed is essential in many situations but (38)______ have you put the telephone down, dissatisfied with what you have managed to say? I don’t think I’ll throw my (39)______ away yet. Câu 30: A. advanced B. progressive C. highly-developed D. all are correct Câu 31: A. for B. with C. from D. to Câu 32: A. on good terms with B. in step with C. in contact with D. in favour of Câu 33: A. mastered B. to master C. mastering D. to be mastered Câu 34: A. for example B. therefore C. however D. in short Câu 35: A. cause B. do C. make D. create Câu 36: A. As though B. Despite C. Even though D. However Câu 37: A. impossible B. unusual C. inefficient D. unimportant Câu 38: A. how about B. how much C. how often D. how long Câu 39: A. effort B. letter C. telephone D. pen Trang 2/5 - Mã đề thi 169 Đọc đoạn văn và trả lời câu hỏi: Long ago prehistoric man began to domesticate a number of wild plants and animals for his own use. This not only provided more abundant food but also allowed more people to live on a smaller plot of ground. We tend to forget that all of our present-day pets, livestock, and food plants were taken from the wild and developed into the forms we know today. As centuries passed and human cultures evolved and blossomed, humans began to organise their knowledge of nature into the broad field of natural history. One aspect of early natural history concerned the use of plants for drugs and medicine. The early herbalists sometimes overworked their imaginations in this respect. For example, it was widely believed that a plant or part of a plant that resembles an internal organ would cure ailments of that organ, Thus, an extract made from a heart- shaped leaf might be prescribed for a person suffering from heart problems. Nevertheless, the overall contributions of these early observers provided the rudiments of our present knowledge of drugs and their uses. Câu 40: What does this passage mainly discuss? A. Prehistoric man. B. The beginning of natural history. C. Cures from plants. D. Early plants and animals. Câu 41: Domestication of plants and animals probably occurred because of …. A. lack of wild animals and plants B. early mans power as a hunter C. need for more readily available food D. the desire of prehistoric man to be nomadic Câu 42: The word “this” refers to ………. A. the earliest condition of prehistoric man B. man’s domestication of plants and animals C. providing food for man D. man’s ability to live on a small plot of land Câu 43: The word “blossomed” is closest in meaning to ….. A. produced flowers B. flourished C. learned D. changed Câu 44: An herbalist is which of the following? A. A dreamer. B. A farmer. C. An early historian. D. Someone who uses plants in medicine. Câu 45: The phrase “in this respect” refers to ……… A. the development of the field of natural history B. the use of plants for drugs and medicine C. the origin of knowledge of nature D. the development of human culture Câu 46: The word “extract” is closest in meaning to ….. A. ailment B. substance C. flavour D. design Câu 47: Which of the following can be inferred from the passage? A. Early herbalists were unimaginative. B. There is little relation between a cure for illness and the physical shape of a plant. C. The shape of a plant is indicative of its ability to cure ailments of a similarly shaped organ. D. The work of early herbalists has nothing to do with present day medicine. Câu 48: The word “rudiments” is closest in meaning to ….. A. history B. beginnings C. proofs D. requirements Câu 49: The passage would most likely lead to a more specific discussion in the field of………. A. biology B. zoology C. astrology D. anatomy Trang 3/5 - Mã đề thi 169 Chọn phần gạch chân cần phải sửa: Câu 50: My daughter attempts passing the entrance examination this year. A B C D Câu 51: I am tired because I’ve been working too hardly A B C D Câu 52: My close friend, that has just got Sacombank's scholarship, is an excellent student. A B C D Câu 53: Are English spoken in your classroom? A B C D Câu 54: If he works more slowly, he wouldn't make so many mistakes. A B C D Câu 55: Computers are using in many fields such as business, medicine and education. A B C D Câu 56: When will this letter translated? A B C D Câu 57: There’s something wrong with this wine-it tastes horribly A B C D Câu 58: How much terms are there in a school year in your country? A B C D Câu 59: Don’t forget to say goodbye to the interviewer before leave the office. A B C D Chọn câu có nghĩa gần với câu cho sẵn: Câu 60: The boy was not intelligent enough to have solved such complex problems alone. A. The complex problems couldn’t be solved because the boy was so stupid. B. The boy was not intelligent but he managed to solve such complex problems. C. The boy, though quite intelligent, couldnt solve the complex problems. D. The boy together with someone else solved the complex problems. Câu 61: Mary loves her mother more than her father. A. Mary loves her mother more than her father does. B. Her father loves her mother but Mary loves her more. C. Mary’s love for her mother is greater than for her father. D. Her father doesn’t love her mother as much as Mary. Câu 62: The singer has given up performing live. A. The singers performance has always been live. B. The singer used to perform live. C. The singers live performance has been cancelled. D. The singer is accustomed to performing live. Câu 63: Had the advertisement for our product been better, more people would have bought it. A. Not many people bought our product because it was so bad. B. Our product was of better quality so that more people would buy it. C. Fewer people bought our product due to its bad quality. D. Since our advertisement for our product was so bad, fewer people bought it. Câu 64: Tom told his girlfriend, “Let me tell him if you can’t”. A. Tom volunteered to tell him if his girlfriend coundn’t. B. Tom advised his girlfriend to tell him if you couldn’t. C. Tom suggested that I should tell him if his girlfriend couldn’t. D. Tom asked his girlfriend to tell him if you couldn’t. Trang 4/5 - Mã đề thi 169 II. PHẦN TỰ LUẬN ( 2 điểm) Viết lại những câu sau theo cách khác với nghĩa gần với câu cho sẵn.(0.5 pt) Câu 1: He is very poor. He can’t buy a second hand bike. --> He is so ………………………………………………………………………………… Câu 2: Students must hand in their assignments before the deadline. --> It is essential that ………………………………………………………………………. Câu 3: It rained heavily, so he didn’t go to shool. --> Had it not ………………………………………………………………………………. Câu 4: He can draw his portrait in 5 minutes. --> His portrait can ………………………………………………………………………… Câu 5: It often takes me thirty minutes to walk to school. --> I often spend …………………………………………………………………………… Viết một đoạn văn khoảng 140 từ nói về một chương trình TV mà bạn yêu thích. (1.5 pts) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------- ----------- HẾT ---------- Thí sinh không được sử dụng tài liệu. Cán bộ coi thi không giải thích gì thêm. Trang 5/5 - Mã đề thi 169 SỞ GD&ĐT BẮC NINH ĐÁP ÁN ĐỀ THI THỬ THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN 1 TRƯỜNG THPT HÀN THUYÊN NĂM HỌC 2015-2016 (Đáp án gồm 02 trang ) MÔN: TIẾNG ANH - 12 I. PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM (64 câu, 8 điểm ) Mã đề Mã đề Câu Câu 169 234 370 482 547 698 703 816 169 234 370 482 547 698 703 816 1 A A B C A C A B 33 B D C C C B C D 2 A B D A C A D B 34 C B A C C B A B 3 B B D A B C D D 35 C B D B A C B B 4 B D A B B A C C 36 C C C D B B A C 5 C A B B C C C D 37 C B D C D C B A 6 A C D B C A D B 38 C C A A B A C B 7 B C A D B C B B 39 D A C B C A C D 8 C A B B C B B A 40 B D D D B D B C 9 D B D D A D A C 41 C B B A A D B D 10 B D B D C D B A 42 B D B B D C D C 11 B D D A A B C B 43 B B B B B C A D 12 D D B A C B D C 44 D B A C D D B D 13 A A C A B B C A 45 B C B D C C A B 14 A C B C B C B C 46 B B C C D A B A 15 C B D B C B B D 47 B B A D B C B C 16 D A B C A C C C 48 B B B C D B B A 17 A D A A C D D C 49 A C C C D B B D 18 C C B D B D C B 50 B A A B A A A A 19 D B D D A C A C 51 D A D B D B A D 20 D D C C C A C D 52 B D B D D A B D 21 D C C C D D C C 53 A A D D A A D A 22 A D C A D C C D 54 A D D A A D D D 23 B C C B C C D B 55 A D D D B D D B 24 C C A B C D D D 56 D B A A B A D A 25 C A D D D A B B 57 D A B A A D B D 26 A D D C A B B D 58 A D A A D B A B 27 C D C A B C D C 59 D B A D D D A A 28 C C C C C B C C 60 D C D D B A A A 29 A A C B C D D D 61 C C A D D B A B 30 D A D B B D D C 62 B D A C D A D B 31 D C C A C A C A 63 D A C A A D C C 32 C C B C D B C A 64 A A C B A A A A PHẦN II: PHẦN TỰ LUẬN ( 2 ĐIỂM) Part I (0.5 pt) 1. He is so poor that he can’t buy a second hand bike. 2. It is essential that students hand in their asssignments before the deadline. 3. Had it not rained heavily, he would have gone to school. 4. His portrait can be drawn in 5 minutes. 5. I often spend thirty minutes (on) walking to school. Part II. (1.5 points) Mô tả tiêu chí đánh giá Điểm tối đa 1. Bố cục 0.40 - Câu đề dẫn chủ đề mạch lạc (Câu chủ đề (Topic sentence) nêu ý chính của đoạn văn - Bố cục hợp lí rõ ràng phù hợp yêu cầu của đề bài - Có thể có câu kết luận (Concluding sentence) tóm tắt ý chính của đoạn văn, hoặc đưa ra một gợi ý, một quan điểm hay một dự đoán. 2. Phát triển ý 0.25 - Phát triển ý có trình tự logic - Có dẫn chứng, ví dụ, … đủ để bảo vệ ý kiến của mình . 3. Sử dụng ngôn từ 0.30 - Sử dụng ngôn từ phù hợp nội dung - Sử dụng ngôn từ đúng văn phong/thể loại - Sử dụng từ nối các ý cho bài viết uyển chuyển 4. Nội dung 0.30 - Đủ thuyết phục người đọc - Đủ dẫn chứng, ví dụ, lập luận - Độ dài: số từ không được nhiều hơn hoặc ít hơn so với quy định 5% 5. Ngữ pháp, đấu câu, và chính tả 0.25 - Sử dụng đúng dấu câu - Chính tả: viết đúng chính tả - + Lỗi chính tả gây hiểu nhầm/sai lệch ý sẽ bị tính một lỗi (trừ 1% điểm của bài viết) - + Cùng một lỗi chính tả lặp lại chỉ tính là một lỗi - Sử dụng đúng thời, thể, cấu trúc câu đúng ngữ pháp. Tổng 1.50 THE END 1 SỞ GD&ĐT BẮC NINH ĐỀ KIỂM TRA CHẤT LƯỢNG ĐẦU NĂM TRƯỜNG THPT HÀN THUYÊN Năm học: 2015 - 2016 ------------------------- Môn: TIẾNG ANH – Khối 12 (Đề có 06 trang) Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (không kể thời gian phát đề) (64 câu trắc nghiệm và phần tự luận) Ngày thi: 15/ 08/ 2015 Họ và tên thí sinh:………………………………………………………. Số báo danh:…………………………………………………………….. Mã đề: 139 I. PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM ( 64 Questions; 8 pts ) Choose one word whose stress pattern is different. Identify your answer by circling the corresponding letter Câu 1: A. gorilla B. typical C. primary D. nursery Câu 2: A. curriculum B. calculation C. defensive D. successfully Câu 3: A. solidarity B. academic C. represent D. organize Choose one word whose underlinedpart is pronounced differently from the rest. Identify your answer by circling Câu 4: A. escape B. especial C. island D. isolate Câu 5: A. explained B. disappointed C. followed D. prepared Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Câu 6: ______it not been for the intolerable heat in the hall, they would have stayed much longer. A. Had B. Should C. If D. But Câu 7: He said, "You ought _____ that library book back to the library" A. to take B. take C. taking D. to be taken Câu 8: Don't touch the cat. It may _____ you. A. tear B. scream C. scratch D. kick Câu 9: You thought I did wrong, but the results ____ my action. A. agree B. correct C. justify D. approve Câu 10: My house is _____ from my office. A. further B. nearly C. far D. near Câu 11: When he retires at sixty, he’ll get a very good_____. A. pay B. salary C. wage D. pension Câu 12: – “We’ll have to hurry if we want to finish this project on time.” - “________”. A. OK. But I’ll call you later. B. I’ll say we will! C. I’m tired. I’ll go home early. D. What a wonderful idea! Câu 13: Daisy’s marriage has been arranged by her family. She is marrying a man _____. A. that she hardly know B. she hardly knows him C. she hardly knows D. whom she hardly know Câu 14: _____, the people who come to this club are in their twenties and thirties. A. Virtually B. To a degree C. Altogether D. By and large Câu 15: Don’t worry! He’ll do the job as ___________ as possible. A. economically B. uneconomically C. beautifully D. economical Câu 16: ____my personal qualities, I have experience of working in a multi-national company for three years. A. In addition B. Beside C. Instead of D. Apart from Trang 1/6 - Mã đề 139 Câu 17: Janet is very modest, always __________ her success. A. keeping down B. turning around C. playing down D. pushing back Câu 18: Many educationalists feel that continued_____ is fairer than formal examinations A. assignment B. cramming C. judgement D. assessment Câu 19: During our stay in Venice, we bought a ________ bottle. A. lovely glass perfume B. glass perfume lovely C. lovely perfume glass D. glass lovely perfume Câu 20: The police are _____ an incident which took place this afternoon. A. investigating B. looking out C. inspecting D. searching Câu 21: It has been conclusively_____ that smoking causes many diseases. A. admitted B. established C. declared D. approved. Câu 22: He’ll be very upset if you ……………..his offer of help. A. turn away B. turn from C. turn down D. turn against Câu 23: Your hair needs__________You’d better have it done tomorrow A. to cut B. cutting C. cut D. being cut Câu 24: “________.” – “Thank you. We are proud of him.” A. Your kid is naughty. B. Can we ask your child to take a photo? C. Your child is just adorable! D. I can give your kid a lift to school. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) SIMILAR in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 25: He didn’t bat a eye when he realized he failed the exam again. A. didn’t want to see B. didn’t show surprise C. wasn’t happy D. didn’t care Câu 26: At every faculty meeting, Ms.Volatie always manages to put her foot in her mouth. A. fall asleep. B. say the wrong thing C. trip over her big feet D. move rapidly Câu 27: The situation seems to be changing minute by minute A. very rapidly B. from time to time C. again and again D. time after time. Câu 28: The lost hikers stayed alive by eating wild berries and frinking spring water. A. connived B. revived C. surprised D. survived Câu 29: A television ad shows a busy baker with a new computer that the advertiser claims will help him “make dough”. A. a baking mixture B. more customers C. money D. bread Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Câu 30: She asked why did Mathew look so embarrassed when he saw Carole. A B C D Câu 31: The children were playing last night outdoors when it began to rain very hard. A B C D Câu 32: I’d prefer to do it on myself, because other people make me nervous. A B C D Câu 33: There was a very interesting news on the radio this morning about the earthquake in Italy. A B C D Câu 34: Could you mind telling me the way to the nearest restaurant? A B C D Trang 2/6 - Mã đề 139 Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks. The tourist industry is (35)_____ to be the largest industry. Before 1950 one million people traveled abroad each year but by the 1900s the figure (36) _____ to 400 million every year. (37) _____ large numbers of tourists, however, are beginning to cause problems. For example, in the Alps the skiers are destroying the mountains they came to enjoy. Even parts of Mount Everest in the Himalayas are reported to be covered (38) _____ old tins, tents, and food that have been (39) _____ But at a time when we have (40) _____ freedom to travel than ever before, more and more people are asking how they can enjoy their holidays (41) _____causing problems by spoiling the countryside. Now there is a new holiday (42) _____called "Holidays That Don't Cost The Earth". It tells you (43) _____you can help the tourist industry by asking your travel agent the right questions (44) _____you go on holiday. Câu 35: A. seen B. regarded C. considered D. figured Câu 36: A. rose B. has risen C. were rising D. had risen Câu 37: A. Such B. Those C. These D. The Câu 38: A. under B. with C. beneath D. by Câu 39: A. launched B. littered C. disposed D. thrown away Câu 40: A. larger B. bigger C. better D. greater Câu 41: A. hardly B. instead of C. apart from D. without Câu 42: A. direction B. instruction C. guidance D. guide Câu 43: A. what B. where C. how D. when Câu 44: A. before B. as soon as C. after D. when Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. Although they are an inexpensive supplier of vitamins, minerals, and high-quality protein, eggs also contain a high level of blood cholesterol, one of the major causes of heart diseases. One egg yolk, in fact, contains a little more than two-thirds of the suggested daily cholesterol limit. This knowledge has caused egg sales to plummet in recent years, which in turn has brought about the development of several alternatives to eating regular eggs. One alternative is to eat substitute eggs. These egg substitutes are not really eggs, but they look somewhat like eggs when they are cooked. They have the advantage of having low cholesterol rates, and they can be scrambled or used in baking. One disadvantage, however, is that they are not good for frying, poaching, or boiling. A second alternative to regular eggs is a new type of egg, sometimes called 'designer' eggs. These eggs are produced by hens that are fed low-fat diets consisting of ingredients such as canola oil, flax, and rice bran. In spite of their diets, however, these hens produce eggs that contain the same amount of cholesterol as regular eggs. Yet, the producers of these eggs claim that eating their eggs will not raise the blood cholesterol in humans. Egg producers claim that their product has been portrayed unfairly. They cite scientific studies to back up their claim. And, in fact, studies on the relationship between eggs and human cholesterol levels have brought mixed results. It may be that it is not the type of egg that is the main determinant of cholesterol but the person who is eating the eggs. Some people may be more sensitive to cholesterol derived from food than other people. In fact, there is evidence that certain dietary fats stimulate the body's production of blood cholesterol. Consequently, while it still makes sense to limit one's intake of eggs, even designer eggs, it seems that doing this without regulating dietary fat will probably not help reduce the blood cholesterol level. Câu 45: What is the main purpose of the passage? A. To persuade people that eggs are unhealthy and should not be eaten B. To introduce the idea that dietary fat increases the blood cholesterol level. C. To convince people to eat 'designer' eggs and egg substitutes. D. To inform people about the relationship between eggs and cholesterol. Câu 46: According to the passage, which of the following is a cause of heart diseases? A. canola oil B. minerals C. cholesterol D. vitamins Trang 3/6 - Mã đề 139 Câu 47: Which of the following could best replace the word 'somewhat'? A. a lot B. in fact C. indefinitely D. a little Câu 48: What has been the cause for changes in the sale of eggs? A. dietary changes in hens B. decreased production C. concerns about cholesterol D. increasing price Câu 49: According to the passage, one yolk contains approximately what fraction of the suggested daily limit for human consumption of cholesterol? A. 1/3 B. 3/4 C. 2/3 D. 1/2 Câu 50: The word 'portrayed' could best be replaced by which of the following? A. studied B. destroyed C. tested D. described Câu 51: What is the meaning of 'back up'? A. support B. block C. advance D. reverse Câu 52: What is meant by the phrase 'mixed results'? A. The results are inconclusive. C. The results are mingled together. B. The results are blended. D. The results are a composite of things. Câu 53: According to the passage, egg substitutes cannot be used to make any of following types of eggs EXCEPT? A. scrambled B. boiled C. fried D. poached Câu 54: According to the author, which of the following may reduce blood cholesterol? A. decreasing egg intake and fat intake B. increasing egg intake and fat intake C. increasing egg intake but not fat intake D. reducing egg intake but not fat intake Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. The goal of Internet-based encyclopedia Wikipedia (www.wikipedia.org) is to give everyone on the planet access to information. Like other encyclopedias, Wikipedia contains lots of information: more than 2.5 million articles in 200 different languages covering just about every subject. Unlike other encyclopedias, however, Wikepedia is not written by experts, but by ordinary people. These writers are not paid and their names are not published. They contribute to Wikipedia simply because they want to share their knowledge. Encyclopedias began in ancient times as collections of writings about all aspects of human knowledge. The word itself comes from ancient Greek, and means “a complete general education”. Real popularity for encyclopedias came in the nineteenth century in Europe and the United States, with the publication of encyclopedias written for ordinary readers. With the invention of the CD-ROM, the same amount of information could be put on a few computer discs. Then with the Internet, it became possible to create an online encyclopedia that could be constantly updated, like Microsoft’s Encarta. However, even Internet-based encyclopedias like Encarta were written by paid experts. At first, Wikipedia, the brainchild of Jimmy Wales, a businessman in Chicago, was not so different from these. In 2001, he had the idea for an Internet-based encyclopedia that would provide information quickly and easily to everyone. Furthermore, that information would be available free, unlike other Internet encyclopedias at that time. But Wales, like everyone else, believed that people with special knowledge were needed to write the articles, and so he began by hiring experts. He soon changed his approach, however, as it took them a long time to finish their work. He decided to open up the encyclopedia in a radical new way, so that everyone would have access not only to the information, but also to the process of putting this information online. To do this, he used what is known as “Wiki” software (from the Hawaiian word for “fast”), which allows users to create or alter content on web page. The system is very simple: When you open the web site, you can simply search for information or you can log on to become a writer or editor of articles. If you find an article that interests you – about your hometown, for example – you can correct it or expand it. This process goes on until no one is interested in making any more changes. Trang 4/6 - Mã đề 139 Câu 55: Wikipedia is a(n) ____. A. journal B. book C. dictionary D. article Câu 56: Wikipedia is written by____. A. millionaires B. normal people C. world experts D. paid written Câu 57: The phrase “these writers” in the first paragraph refers to ____. A. every subject B. encyclopedia experts C. ordinary people D. ordinary readers Câu 58: The phrase “the word” in the second paragraph refers to____. A. knowledge B. encyclopedia C. writing D. collection Câu 59: Microsoft’s Encarta is cited in the passage as an example of ____. A. CD-ROM dictionary B. printed encyclopedia C. updateable online encyclopedia D. online encyclopedia Câu 60: The word “brainchild” in the second paragraph of the passage can be best replaced by____. A. born B. product C. child D. father Câu 61: The word “approach” in the third paragraph of the passage means____. A. time B. idea C. method D. writing Câu 62: The user of Wikipedia can do all of the following EXCEPT____. A. have access to information B. determinate the website C. edit information D. modify information Câu 63: We can say that Jimmy Wales____. A. became very famous after the formation of Wikipedia B. decides who can use Wikipedia C. is the father of Wikipedia D. made a great profit from Wikipedia Câu 64: Wiki software enables ____. A. a purchase of information B. limited access C. editing D. exchanging articles Trang 5/6 - Mã đề 139 II. PHẦN TỰ LUẬN ( 2 điểm) Part 1. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. (1pt) Question 1:.It is said that the Great Pyramid of Giza was built over a 20-year period → The Great Pyramid of Giza ……………………………………………………… Question 2:. John has not seen his father since six months ago. → The last time …………………………………………………………………………… Question 3:. This Computer is so old that it’s not worth keeping. → This is …………………………………………………………………………… Question 4:. He did not pass his driving test until he was nearly 30. → It was …………………………………………………………………………… Question 5:. The motorcyclist rounded the corner at a quite unbelievable speed → The speed …………………………………………………………………………… Question 6: I last had my hair cut when I left her. → I haven’t………………………………………………………………………………… Question 7: The tea was too hot for Peter to drink. → The tea was so………………………………………………………………………….. Question 8: It was the goalkeeper that saved the match for us. → Had ……. ……………………………………………………………………………… Question 9: “I’m sorry, I didn’t call you this morning” Tom said to Mary. → Tom apologised…………………………………………………………………………. Question 10: Immediately after his arrival, things went wrong. → No sooner ………………………………………………………………………………. Part 2: Supply the correct tenses of the verbs in the brackets. (0.5 pt) 1. My clothes aren’t in the room. They (take) them away. 2. I can’t go with you as I (not finish) my work. 3. Who you (go) to the cinema with last night? 4. At this time next week they (sit) in the train on the way to Paris. 5. Lastnight the experiment (make) when the lights went out. Part 3: Complete each sentence with a word formed from the word in capitals. (0.5 pt) 1. The teacher stressed the need for regular………. (ATTEND) 2. Sarah …………opened the door of the cellar, wondering what she might find. (CAUTION) 3. This jewel isn’t simply valuable, it is ……………… (VALUE) 4. The thief replaced the diamond with a ………… stone. (WORTH) 5. He may not be a handsome man, but he’s a………………. husband. (RELY) - THE END - Trang 6/6 - Mã đề 139 SỞ GD&ĐT BẮC NINH ĐÁP ÁN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA CHẤT LƯỢNG ĐẦU NĂM TRƯỜNG THPT HÀN THUYÊN NĂM HỌC 2015-2016 (Đáp án gồm 02 trang ) MÔN: TIẾNG ANH - 12 I. PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM (64 câu, 8 điểm ) Mã đề Mã đề Câu Câu 139 298 364 457 516 671 780 842 139 298 364 457 516 671 780 842 1 A C B C D A C B 33 B B B A B B B A 2 B D D B D A C B 34 A B B B B B B B 3 D D C D A D A C 35 C C D B A D D B 4 C A D B B B B D 36 D A D D C A D C 5 B D A D B C D A 37 A C C B C B A D 6 A A B B D D B C 38 B A C C D B C A 7 A A A B D C B D 39 D A A C B A C A 8 C B A D A A B C 40 D B A C D A B B 9 C C C A C B C B 41 D A C A A C C D 10 C B C D B C C A 42 D A D D C C A D 11 D D D C D D B D 43 C C A C C C B D 12 B B B D B B D D 44 A D A D C B D C 13 C C D A C D B C 45 D C B A A D A D 14 D D D B A B D A 46 C C A C C B A B 15 A D C D C B A A 47 D C B A B C C A 16 D C B C D C A D 48 C C A C A D C B 17 D D C C A C A C 49 C D D B D B B D 18 D B C A A A A B 50 D B D C C C D D 19 A A C A B D B A 51 A B A D B A D A 20 A B A B C D D D 52 A A B A B B B A 21 B C B B D D D A 53 A D D A D A C C 22 C B A C A C A B 54 A B B D C B D B 23 B A C A C A B A 55 A D D A C A C C 24 C D B D A C A C 56 B B B B A C D D 25 B C D B D D D A 57 C D C B D C C B 26 B D A C D D D A 58 B C D D A A D C 27 A B C C D D A C 59 D A B A B A A C 28 D A D D B D C D 60 B B C A D C B C 29 C D D C D D A D 61 B C C A A C C B 30 B A B B A B A B 62 B A A D B A C C 31 B B B B B B B B 63 C D C C C D D C 32 B B A B B A B B 64 C C C D C B C B PHẦN TỰ LUẬN ( 2 pts) Part 1: (1 pt) Question 1: The Great Pyramid of Giza is said to have been built over a 20-year period Question 2: The last time John saw his father was 6 months ago Question 3: This is such an old computer that it’s not worth keeping. ( This is so old a computer that it’s not worth keeping.) Question 4: It was not until he was nearly 30 that he passed his driving test Question 5: The speed at which the motorcyclist rounded the corner was quite unbelievable Question 6: I haven’t had my hair cut since I left her Question 7: The tea was so hot that Peter couldn’t drink it Question 8: Had it not been for the goalkeeper, we would have lost the match. Question 9: Tom apologised for not calling/having called Mary that morning Question 10: No sooner had he arrived than things went wrong Part 2: ( 0.5 pt) 1. have taken 2. haven’t finished 3. did you go 4. will be sitting 5. was being made Part 3: ( 0.5 pt) 1.attendance 2.cautiously 3. invaluable 4. worthless 5. reliable THE END 9 SỞ GD & ĐT VĨNH PHÚC ĐỀ KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 LỚP 12 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC NĂM HỌC 2015-2016 Đề thi có 05 trang ĐỀ THI MÔN: TIẾNG ANH Thời gian làm bài : 90 phút , không kể thời gian giao đề Mã đề thi 207 Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. This rapid transcontinental settlement and these new urban industrial circumstances of the last half of the 19th century were accompanied by the development of a national literature of great abundance and variety. New themes, new forms, new subjects, new regions, new authors, new audiences all emerged in the literature of this half century. As a result, at the onset of World War I, the spirit and substance of American literature had evolved remarkably, just as its center of production had shifted from Boston to New York in the late 1880s and the sources of its energy to Chicago and the Midwest. No longer was it produced, at least in its popular forms, in the main by solemn, typically moralistic men from New England and the Old South; no longer were polite, well-dressed, grammatically correct, middle-class young people the only central characters in its narratives; no longer were these narratives to be set in exotic places and remote times; no longer, indeed, were fiction, poetry, drama, and formal history the chief acceptable forms of literary expression; no longer, finally, was literature read primarily by young, middle class women. In sum, American literature in these years fulfilled in considerable measure the condition Walt Whitman called for in 1867 in describing Leaves of Grass: it treats, he said of his own major work, each state and region as peers "and expands from them, and includes the world ... connecting an American citizen with the citizens of all nations." At the same time, these years saw the emergence of what has been designated "the literature of argument," powerful works in sociology, philosophy, psychology, many of them impelled by the spirit of exposure and reform. Just as America learned to play a role in this half century as an autonomous international political, economic, and military power, so did its literature establish itself as a producer of major works. Câu 1: The word “evolved” in paragraph two is closest in meaning to______________ A. changed B. turned back C. diminished D. became famous Câu 2: All of the following can be inferred from the passage about the ne J literature EXCEPT____________ A. It was not highly regarded internationally B. It broke with many literary traditions of the past C. It spoke to the issue of reform and change D. It introduced new American themes, characters, and settings Câu 3: The phrase “these years” in the third paragraph refers to ___________. A. the early 1800s B. 1850-1900 C. the 1900s D. the present Câu 4: The word “it” in the second paragraph refers to______________ A. the population B. American literature C. the energy D. the manufacturing Câu 5: It can be inferred from the first paragraph that the previous passagfl probably discussed_____________ A. new developments in industrialization and population shifts B. he importance of tradition to writers C. the limitations of American literature to this time D. the fashions and values of 19th century America Câu 6: This passage would probably be read in which of the followii academic courses? Trang 1/7 - Mã đề thi 207 A. Current events B. International affairs C. American literature D. European history Câu 7: The word “exotic" in paragraph two is closest in meaning to_________ A. unusual B. old-fashioned C. well-known D. urban Câu 8: The main idea of this passage is____________ A. that the new American literature was less provincial than the old B. that most people were wary of the new literature C. that World War I caused a dramatic change in America D. that centers of culture shifted from East to West Câu 9: The author uses the word “indeed” in the second paragraph for what purpose? A. To show a favorable attitude to these forms of literature. B. To emphasize the contrast he is making. C. For variety in a lengthy paragraph. D. To wind down his argument. Câu 10: It can be inferred from the passage that Walt Whitman_____________ A. was disapproving of the new literature B. disliked urban life C. was an international diplomat D. wrote Leaves of Grass Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Câu 11: A. vision B. conclusion C. division D. comparison Câu 12: A. solution B. could C. pull D. look Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks. Speech is one of the most important (13) ______ communicating. It consists of far more than just making noises. To talk and also to (14) ______ by other people, we have to speak a language, that is, we have to use combinations of (15) ______ that everyone agrees to stand for a particular object or idea. Communication would be impossible if everyone made up their own language. Learning a language properly is very (16)______ . The basic (17) ______ of English is not very large, and not only about 2,000 words are needed to speak it quite (18)______. But the more idea you can (19) ______ the more precise you can be about their exact meaning. Words are the (20) ______ thing we use in communicating what we want to say. The way we (21)______ the words is also very important. Our tone of voice can express many emotions and (22) ______ whether we are pleasedor angry, for instance. Câu 13: A. rules B. reason C. ways D. tests Câu 14: A. be understood B. be spoken C. be examined D. be talked Câu 15: A. sounds B. languages C. systems D. talks Câu 16: A. easy B. expensive C. simple D. important Câu 17: A. grammar B. structure C. vocabulary D. word Câu 18: A. perfect B. good C. well D. fluent Câu 19: A. need B. grow C. express D. pass Câu 20: A. most B. main C. certain D. full Câu 21: A. talk B. send C. pass D. say Câu 22: A. know B. show C. ask D. understand Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Câu 23: The visitors were complaining______in the rain. A. for waiting B. me about waiting C. about having to wait D. that they have to wait Câu 24: Family_________later took on a much greater significance in his life. Trang 2/7 - Mã đề thi 207 A. relatives B. relationships C. relation D. relations Câu 25: Joanne is criticising Alex for taking a late flight. Choose the most suitable response to fill in the blank in the following exchange. Joanne: “You should have flown with the earlier flight!” Alex: “___________________” A. Oh, I’m sorry to hear that. B. It was fully booked. C. Yes, I should D. Why not? Câu 26: Safety should take _________over all other matters in the workplace. A. precede B. precedent C. preceding D. precedence Câu 27: We arranged to meet at the station, but she didn’t___________. A. get through B. turn up C. walk out D. wait on Câu 28: Some sciologists believe that the_________family of parents and children is rapidly becoming a thing of the past. A. extended B. joint C. nuclear D. closed Câu 29: __________with your friends and give me your answer tomorrow. A. Talk over it B. Talk it over C. Work it out D. Look into it Câu 30: In 1959 the political philosopher Hannah Arendt became the first woman_______a full professor at Princeton University. A. to appoint B. was appointed C. to be appointed D. who be appointed as Câu 31: They______the job by this time tomorrow. A. will be finishing B. will finish C. are finishing D. will have finished Câu 32: Mark first________ his wife three years ago when they_________at university. A. met/ have studied B. met/ were studying C. has met/ studied D. met/ had been studying Câu 33: Mike asked Sarah how long______English so far. A. she had been learning B. she learned C. she has been learning D. had she learned Câu 34: In Britain, most pupils transfer from primary to________school at the age of 11. A. secondary B. elementary C. upper D. middle Câu 35: Any child has the right to an education________of sex, creed, race or nationality. A. regardless B. providing C. despite D. because Câu 36: _________, these students are among the best prepared who have been through this university. A. On the whole B. At the whole C. In the general D. In generally Câu 37: Your car is too dirty! When did you have it___________? A. to be washed B. wash C. washed D. to wash Câu 38: ______her tears, she waved goodbye to her family from the station platform. A. Filling out B. Bringing in C. Turnin over D. Fighting back Câu 39: Paul is asking Joe for permission to play the guitar in the room. Choose the most suitable response to fill in the blank in the following exchange. Paul: “Is it all right if I play the guitar in here while you’re studying?” Joe: “_____________________” A. Well, if only you didn’t. B. Oh, I wish you wouldn’t. C. Well, actually, I’d prefer it if you didn’t D. Well, I’d rather not. Câu 40: She said she met you once at the Parade last week. _________since? A. Have you met her B. Were you met her C. Had you met her D. Did you meet her Câu 41: I am sorry I cannot hear what you________because everybody ______so loudly. A. were saying/ has talked B. said/ was talking C. have just said/ is talking D. are saying/ talk Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Trang 3/7 - Mã đề thi 207 Câu 42: The new laws to conserve wildlife in the area will come into force next month. A. eliminate B. protect C. pullute D. destroy Câu 43: My uncle, who is an accomplished guitarist, taught me how to play. A. unqualified B. ill-educated C. unskilled D. unimpaired Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) SIMILAR in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 44: Every woman who had enough criteria can join the beauty contest irrespective of their background. A. under guarantee B. in consideration of C. regardless of D. on account of Câu 45: Although we argued with him for a long time, he stood his ground. A. wanted to continue B. felt sorry for us C. refused to change his decision D. changed his decision Câu 46: I am concerned about my children. A. angry B. sad C. happy D. worried Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. Ever since humans have inhabited the earth, they have made use of various forms of communication. Generally, this expression of thoughts and feelings has been in the form of oral speech. When there is a language barrier, communication is accomplished through sign language in which motions stand for letters, words, and ideas. Tourists, the deaf, and the mute have had to resort to this form of expression. Many of these symbols of whole words are very picturesque and exact and can be used internationally, spelling, however, cannot. Body language transmits ideas or thoughts by certain actions, either intentionally or unintentionally. A wink can be a way of flirting or indicating that the party is only joking. A nod signifies approval, while shaking the head indicates a negative reaction. Other forms of nonlinguistic language can be found in Braille (a system of raised dots read with the fingertips), signal flags, Morse code, and smoke signals. Road maps and picture signs also guide, warn, and instruct people. While verbalization is the most common form of language, other systems and techniques also express human thoughts and feelings. Câu 47: Which form other than oral speech would be the most commonly be the most commonly used among blind people? A. Signal flags B. Picture signs C. Body language D. Braille Câu 48: Which of the following best summarizes this passage? A. Although other forms of communication exist, verbalization is the fastest. B. When language is a barrier, people will find other forms of communication. C. Nonlinguistic language is invaluable to foreigners. D. Everybody uses only one form of communication. Câu 49: Sign language is said to be very picturesque and exact and can be used internationally EXCEPT for_____________ A. spelling B. whole words C. ideas D. expressions Câu 50: What would be MOST likely to use Morse code? A. A scientist B. A spy C. An airline pilot D. A telegrapher Câu 51: The word "wink" in the second paragraph means most nearly the same as______________ A. bob the head up and down B. close one eye briefly C. shake the head from side to side D. close two eyes briefly Câu 52: How many different forms of communication are mentioned here? A. 7 B. 5 C. 11 D. 9 Câu 53: People need to communicate in order to_____________. A. keep from reading with their fingertips B. be picturesque and exact C. create language barriers D. express thoughts and feelings Trang 4/7 - Mã đề thi 207 Câu 54: The word "these" in the first paragraph refers to___________ A. thoughts and feelings B. tourists C. sign language motions D. the deaf and the mute Câu 55: All of the following statements are true EXCEPT______________ A. There are many forms of communication in existence today. B. Verbalization is the most common form of communication. C. Ideas and thoughts can be transmitted by body language. D. The deaf and mute can use an oral form of communication. Câu 56: What is the best title for the passage? A. The Many Forms of Communication B. Picturesque Symbols of Communication C. Ways of Expressing Feelings D. The Importance of Sign Language Mark the letter A, B C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Câu 57: The woman accused to shoplift was found not guilty and was acquitted A. accused B. to shoplift C. not guilty D. was acquitted Câu 58: Most college-age students today are interested in finding universities in which can pursue both academic and athletic extra-cirricular activities. A. which can B. Most C. both D. interested in Câu 59: While the teacher was explaining the some on the blackboard, the children threw paper aeroplanes around the classroom. A. around B. threw C. on the D. was explaining Câu 60: The human brain is often comparing to a computer, but such an analogy can be misleading. A. misleading B. The human C. but such D. comparing Câu 61: You can apply for a better job when you will have had more experience. A. when B. will have had C. apply for D. more experience Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of the primary stress in each of the following questions. Câu 62: A. certificate B. compulsory C. undergraduate D. curriculum Câu 63: A. accountancy B. concentrate C. allegedly D. bewildered Câu 64: A. marvellous B. counterpart C. compliment D. determine WRITING Part I. Finish each of the following sentences in s uch a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Question 65: “I should say nothing about it if I were you” my brother said. My brother advised …………………………………………………………….. Question 66: The architect has drawn plans for an extension to the house. Plans ………………………………………………………………. Question 67: Everybody has agreed that changes to the scheme are necessary. Changes ……………………………………………………………….. Question 68: They are going to rebuild our kitchen next week. We ………………………………………………………………….. Question 69: The Presidential visit attracted such an enormous crowd that all traffic came to a standstill. So many people turned …………………………………………………………. Part II. In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the person in your family who you admire most. The following prompts may be helpful to you: + Who is the person you admire most in your family? + What does he/she look like? + What are his/her personalities? + Why do you admire him/her most? ----------------------------------------------- ----------- HẾT -------- Trang 5/7 - Mã đề thi 207 ĐÁP ÁN PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM 1 A 17 C 33 A 49 A 2 A 18 C 34 A 50 D 3 B 19 C 35 A 51 B 4 B 20 B 36 A 52 D 5 A 21 D 37 C 53 D 6 C 22 B 38 D 54 C 7 A 23 C 39 C 55 D 8 A 24 B 40 A 56 A 9 B 25 B 41 C 57 B 10 D 26 D 42 D 58 A 11 D 27 B 43 C 59 B 12 A 28 C 44 C 60 D 13 C 29 B 45 C 61 B 14 A 30 C 46 D 62 C 15 A 31 D 47 D 63 B 16 D 32 B 48 B 64 D PHẦN VIẾT (2 điểm) I (0,5 điểm) Câu 65: My brother advised me not to say/ to say nothing about it. Câu 66: Plans for an extension to the house have been drawn by the architect. Câu 67:Changes to the scheme have been agreed to be necessary. Câu 68: We are going to have our kitchen rebuilt next week. Câu 69: So many people turned out to see the President that all traffic came to a standstill. II. (1,5 điểm) Mô tả tiêu chí đánh giá điểm tối đa: 1. Bố cục (0,40 điểm) o Câu đề dẫn chủ đề mạch lạc o Bố cục hợp lí rõ ràng phù hợp yêu cầu của đề bài o Bố cục uyển chuyển từ mở bài đến kết luận 2. Phát triển ý (0,25 điểm) o Phát triển ý có trình tự logic o Có dẫn chứng, ví dụ, … đủ để bảo vệ ý kiến của mình 3. Sử dụng ngôn từ (0,30 điểm) o Sử dụng ngôn từ phù hợp nội dung o Sử dụng ngôn từ đúng văn phong/ thể loại o Sử dụng từ nối các ý cho bài viết uyển chuyển 4. Nội dung (0,30 điểm) o Đủ thuyết phục người đọc o Đủ dẫn chứng, ví dụ, lập luận o Độ dài: Số từ không nhiều hơn hoặc ít hơn so với quy định 5% 5. Ngữ pháp, dấu câu, và chính tả: (0,25 điểm) o Sử dụng đúng dấu câu o Chính tả: Viết đúng chính tả. Lỗi chính tả gây hiểu nhầm/ sai lệch ý sẽ bị tính một lỗi (trừ 1% điểm của bài viết). Cùng một lỗi chính tả lặp lại chỉ tính là một lỗi o Sử dụng đúng thời, thể, cấu trúc câu đúng ngữ pháp.(Lỗi ngữ pháp gây hiểu nhầm/ sai lệch ý sẽ bị trừ 1% điểm bài viết.) Trang 6/7 - Mã đề thi 207 Tổng 1,50 Trang 7/7 - Mã đề thi 207 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC 2 ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 NĂM HỌC 2015 - 2016 Môn: Tiếng Anh, Khối: 12 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Không kể thời gian phát đề) Đề thi gồm: 06 trang Mã đề: 140 SECTION A: MULTIPLE CHOICE. Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: THE OPEN UNIVERSITY The Open University was created in 1968 to give people who cannot afford (1)_______ attend regular courses of study, the opportunity of studying and (2)_______ a university diploma or degree. They study at home and their academic performance is assessed by (3)_______ of written examinations or project work. Most Open University students (4)_______ in study while also holding down a job or coping with a busy home life. They study in order to update their job skills or for personal (5)_______ . At the heart of most courses is a (6)_______ of specially written and professionally printed textbooks and workbooks which students receive by post. On many of the courses, students are expected to watch television programmes on the BBC network, (7)_______ are usually broadcast in the (8)_______ hours of the morning. The (9)_______ of these programmes is to develop and broaden the study experience, (10)_______ students do not have to rely only on the printed material they are sent. Question 1. A. to B. in C. with D. for Question 2. A. obtain B. to obtain C. obtained D. obtaining Question 3. A. means B. method C. route D. system Question 4. A. fit B. take C. put D. join Question 5. A. satisfying B. satisfaction C. satisfactory D. satisfied Question 6. A. club B. heap C. set D. unit Question 7. A. what B. which C. who D. that Question 8. A. first B. early C. initial D. starting Question 9. A. end B. aim C. reason D. cause Question 10.A. although B. however C. even though D. so that Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is CLOSET in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 11. I didn't think his comments were very appropriate at the time. A. right B. correct C. exact D. suitable Question 12. Professor Smith was very interested in the diversity of cultures all over the world. A. difference B. changes C. conservation D. variety Question 13. When you are in a restaurant, you can raise your hand slightly to show that you need assistance. A. food B. help C. bill D. menu Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from that of the others: Question 14. A. majority B. ceremony C. maintain D. engage Question 15. A. examination B. sociology C. university D. geographical Trang 1/6 - Mã đề thi 140 Question 16. A. sacrifice B. romantic C. marriage D. conical Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from that of the rest: Question 17. A. cooked B. wicked C. looked D. picked Question 18. A. rises B. fixes C. likes D. matches Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE Education is another area of social life in which information technology is changing the way we communicate. Today's college students may not simply sit in a lecture or a library to learn about their field. Through their computers and the wonders of virtual reality they can participate in lifelike simulated experiences. Consider the following scenario of the future of education made possible through developments in information technology. For children over the age of 10, daily attendance at schools is not compulsory. Some of the older children attend school only once or twice weekly to get tutorial support or instruction from a teacher. For the most part, pupils are encouraged to work online from home. Students must complete a minimum number of study hours per year; however, they may make up these hours by studying at home at times that suit their family schedule. They can log on early or late in the day and even join live classes in other countries. In order to ensure that each student is learning adequately, computer software will automatically monitor the number of hours a week each student studies on-line as well as that students' learning materials and assessment activities. Reports will be available for parents and teachers. The software can then identify the best learning activities and condition for each individual student and generate similar activities. It can also identify areas of weak achievement and produce special programs adjusted to the students' needs. Question 19. How many times are children who are older than 10 required to go to school weekly? A. notime B. three times C. four times D. once or twice Question 20. The pronoun "it" in paragraph 1 refers to ___________ A. the software B. learning activities C. condition D. individual student Question 21. What is NOT MENTIONED as a benefit of information technology to the students? A. Students' learning time won't be monitored. B. Students' weak achievement can be identified. C. Students can learn at times that suit their schedule. D. Students can stay at home to learn. Question 22. What CAN'T the software do? A. Monitor the time the students learn. B. Find out the best activities for the students. C. Identify weaknesses of the students. D. Design materials for the students Question 23. What is the topic of the passage? A. The effect of information technology on education. B. Computer software will make sure students learn at home. C. Students can know about their weak aspects to focus. D. students don't have to go to school any more. Question 24. The word suit in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. enhance B. show up C. fit D. distub Question 25. The pronoun "They" in paragraph 1 refers to ________ Trang 2/6 - Mã đề thi 140 A. college students B. The computers C. the wonders of virtual reality D. The lectures Question 26. Who/What counts the number of hours per week that students spend learning? A. Parents B. Teacher C. Computer software D. Virtual reality Question 27. The word adequately in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. suficiently B. significantly C. consequently D. Suitably Question 28. The word encouraged in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. Suggested B. Allowed C. Permitted D. stimulated Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 29. I'll make some sandwiches before I'll leave for work. A. I'll leave B. for work C. I'll make D. some sandwiches before Question 30. The reason why he's not feeling very well is simple - he's ate too much as usual. A. is simple B. he's not feeling C. he's ate D. as usual Question 31. Where I am living now is convenient for work because I don't have travel far. A. for work because I don't B. is convenient C. have travel far D. Where I am Question 32. She washes her hair at least six time a week A. time B. at least six C. washes her hair D. a week Question 33. Mary found it hard to concentrate on her work because the noise. A. because the noise B. it hard C. work D. to concentrate Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: Esperanto is what is called a planned, or artificial language. It was created more than a century ago by Polish eye doctor Ludwik Lazar Zamenhof. Zamenhof believed that a common language would help to alleviate some of the misunderstandings among cultures. In Zamenhofs first attempt at a universal language, he tried to create a language that was as uncomplicated as possible. This first language included words such as ab, ac, ba, eb, be, and ce. This did not result in a workable language in that these monosyllabic words. though short, were not easy to understand or to retain Next, Zamenhof tried a different way of constructing a simplified language. He made the words in his language sound like words that people already knew, but he simplified the grammar tremendously. One example of how he simplified the language can be seen in the suffixes: all nouns in this language end in 0, as in the noun amiko, which means "friend," and all adjectives end in -a, as in the adjective bela, which means "pretty." Another example of the simplified language can be seen in the prefix mal-, which makes a word opposite in meaning; the word malamiko therefore means "enemy," and the word malbela therefore means "ugly" in Zamenhofs language. In 1887, Zamenhof wrote a description of this language and published it. He used a pen name, Dr. Esperanto, when signing the book. He selected the name Esperanto because this word means "a person who hopes" in his language. Esperanto clubs began popping up throughout Europe and by1905, Esperanto had spread from Europe to America and Asia. In 1905, the First World Congress of Esperanto took place in France, with approximately 700 attendees from 20 different countries. Congresses were held annually for nine years, and 4,000 attendees were registered for the Tenth World Esperanto Congress scheduled for 1914, when World War I erupted and forced its cancellation. Trang 3/6 - Mã đề thi 140 Esperanto has had its ups and downs in the period since World War I. Today, years after it was introduced, it is estimated that perhaps a quarter of a million people are fluent in it. This may seem like a large number, but it is really quite small when compared with the billion English speakers and billion Mandarin Chinese speakers in today's world. Current advocates would like to see its use grow considerably and are taking steps to try to make this happen. Question 34. The expression "popping up" in the fourth paragraph could best be replaced by ____________. A. shouting B. leaping C. hiding D. opening Question 35. It can be inferred from the passage that the Third World Congress of Esperanto took place in__________ . A. 1905 B. 1907 C. 1913 D. 1909 Question 36. This passage would most likely be assigned reading in a course on ________. A. English grammar B. applied linguistics C. world government D. European history Question 37. Which paragraph describes the predecessor to Esperanto? A. The second paragraph B. The first paragraph C. The third paragraph D. The last paragraph Question 38. According to the passage, Zamenhof wanted to create a universal language _________. A. to provide a more complex language B. to build a name for himself C. to resolve cultural differences D. to create one world culture Question 39. According to the passage, what happened to the Tenth World Esperanto Congress? A. It had 4,000 attendees. B. It was scheduled for 1915. C. It had attendees from 20 countries D. It never took place. Question 40. The topic of this passage is ______. A. using language to communicate internationally B. how language can be improved C. a language developed in the last few years D. one man's efforts to create a universal language Question 41. It can be inferred from the passage that the Esperanto word malespera means __________. A. hopelessness B. hopeful C. hopeless D. hope Question 42. The expression "ups and downs" in the last paragraph is closed in meaning to____________ A. takeoffs and landings B. highs and lows C. floors and ceilings D. tops and bottoms Question 43. The paragraph following the passage most likely discusses __________. A. another of Zamenhofs accomplishment. B. the disadvantages of usi:1g an artificial language. C. how current supporters of Esperanto are encouraging its growth. D. attempts to reconvene the World Congress of Esperanto in the 1920s Choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 44. The advanced students are selected to take part ______ the annual International Olympic Competition. A. at B. for C. from D. in Question 45. It was _____ simple a question that everyone answered it correctly. A. such B. so C. very D. too Trang 4/6 - Mã đề thi 140 Question 46. The man said that he _________ the following day. A. would return B. returned C. will return D. had returned Question 47. We always feel ________ and secure in our family. A. safeguard B. safely C. safe D. safety Question 48. "He didn't understand it." - "________." A. So did I B. Neither did I C. Was he? D. I did too Question 49. _______the manager's suggestions were reasonable, the supervisor agreed with them. A. Until B. Although C. Even though D. Because Question 50. She accepted that she had acted _______ and mistakenly, which broke up her marriage. A. wisely B. romantically C. unwisely D. attractively Question 51. Mary asked me whether I _________ the football match on TV the day before. A. watch B. had watched C. have watched D. would watch Question 52. My mother is the first________ up and the last________ to bed. A. getting- to go B. to get- going C. to get- to go D. getting- going Question 53. _________ includes our posture, facial expressions and gestures. A. Verbal B. Communication C. Body language D. Signal Question 54. When I _______ to the party, Tom and David _______, and John ________. A. was coming/ had danced/ singing B. have come/ are dancing/ is singing C. have come/ are dancing/ is singing D. came/ were dancing/ was singing Question 55. English, Maths and Science are _____ subjects in the national curriculum in England. A. core B. public C. supportive D. independent Question 56. Fee-paying schools, often called "independent schools" or "___________ schools" A. public B. primary C. state D. secondary Question 57. A: " How much sugar do you want in your coffee?" B: " ____" A. So much B. Too much C. Not much D. Little bit Question 58. I must thank the man from ________ I got the present. A. whom B. that C. who D. which Question 59. Members of your family have very close relationship with each other, ________? A. have they B. do they C. haven't they D. don't they Question 60. _____ in the diet is especially important for vegetarians. A. They obtain enough protein B. Obtaining enough protein C. By obtaining enough protein D. Enough protein is obtained Question 61. The telephone _______ by Alexander Graham Bell. A. inventing B. being invented C. was invented D. invented Question 62. A: Thanks very much for your help. B "_________." A. that's right B. You're welcome C. Yes, please D. never mind Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 63. If you are at a loose end this weekend, I will show you round the city. A. reluctant. B. free C. confident D. busy Question 64. The government has decided that the publication of the report would be "contrary to the public interest". A. unpleasant B. despicable C. agreeable D. urbane Trang 5/6 - Mã đề thi 140 SECTION B: WRITING Part 1: Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. 1. I started learning English five years ago. I have ................................................................................................................................. 2. They said that Paula had quit five jobs before working for us. Paula……………………………………………………………………………………... 3. “Don’t forget to lock the door before you go out”, his mother said . His mother ……………………………………………………………………………… 4. If you don’t study hard, you will not be able to pass the final exam. Unless..………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. “ Let’s go to the cinema tonight” he said. He suggested……………………………………………………………………………… Part 2: In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the advantages of learning English well. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet. The following prompts might be helpful to you. - Communicating with people from other countries - Widening knowledge about other cultures - Getting good job in the future - ….. ____________________ HẾT ___________________ Thí sinh không được sử dụng tài liệu. Cán bộ coi thi không giải thích gì thêm. Họ và tên thí sinh: …………………………………….., Số báo danh: …………….. Trang 6/6 - Mã đề thi 140 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC 2 ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 NĂM HỌC 2015 - 2016 Môn: Tiếng Anh, Khối: 12 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Không kể thời gian phát đề) Đề thi gồm: 06 trang Mã đề: 174 SECTION A: MULTIPLE CHOICE. Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from that of the others: Question 1. A. university B. examination C. geographical D. sociology Question 2. A. ceremony B. majority C. engage D. maintain Question 3. A. conical B. marriage C. sacrifice D. romantic Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: THE OPEN UNIVERSITY The Open University was created in 1968 to give people who cannot afford (4)_______ attend regular courses of study, the opportunity of studying and (5)_______ a university diploma or degree. They study at home and their academic performance is assessed by (6)_______ of written examinations or project work. Most Open University students (7)_______ in study while also holding down a job or coping with a busy home life. They study in order to update their job skills or for personal (8)_______ . At the heart of most courses is a (9)_______ of specially written and professionally printed textbooks and workbooks which students receive by post. On many of the courses, students are expected to watch television programmes on the BBC network, (10)_______ are usually broadcast in the (11)_______ hours of the morning. The (12)_______ of these programmes is to develop and broaden the study experience, (13)_______ students do not have to rely only on the printed material they are sent. Question 4. A. to B. with C. in D. for Question 5. A. obtaining B. obtain C. to obtain D. obtained Question 6. A. method B. means C. system D. route Question 7. A. fit B. join C. put D. take Question 8. A. satisfaction B. satisfactory C. satisfied D. satisfying Question 9. A. unit B. heap C. club D. set Question 10. A. who B. that C. which D. what Question 11. A. first B. early C. initial D. starting Question 12. A. cause B. reason C. end D. aim Question 13. A. although B. however C. so that D. even though Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: Esperanto is what is called a planned, or artificial language. It was created more than a century ago by Polish eye doctor Ludwik Lazar Zamenhof. Zamenhof believed that a common language would help to alleviate some of the misunderstandings among cultures. In Zamenhofs first attempt at a universal language, he tried to create a language that was as uncomplicated as possible. This first language included words such as ab, ac, ba, eb, be, and ce. Trang 1/6 - Mã đề thi 174 This did not result in a workable language in that these monosyllabic words. though short, were not easy to understand or to retain Next, Zamenhof tried a different way of constructing a simplified language. He made the words in his language sound like words that people already knew, but he simplified the grammar tremendously. One example of how he simplified the language can be seen in the suffixes: all nouns in this language end in 0, as in the noun amiko, which means "friend," and all adjectives end in -a, as in the adjective bela, which means "pretty." Another example of the simplified language can be seen in the prefix mal-, which makes a word opposite in meaning; the word malamiko therefore means "enemy," and the word malbela therefore means "ugly" in Zamenhofs language. In 1887, Zamenhof wrote a description of this language and published it. He used a pen name, Dr. Esperanto, when signing the book. He selected the name Esperanto because this word means "a person who hopes" in his language. Esperanto clubs began popping up throughout Europe and by1905, Esperanto had spread from Europe to America and Asia. In 1905, the First World Congress of Esperanto took place in France, with approximately 700 attendees from 20 different countries. Congresses were held annually for nine years, and 4,000 attendees were registered for the Tenth World Esperanto Congress scheduled for 1914, when World War I erupted and forced its cancellation. Esperanto has had its ups and downs in the period since World War I. Today, years after it was introduced, it is estimated that perhaps a quarter of a million people are fluent in it. This may seem like a large number, but it is really quite small when compared with the billion English speakers and billion Mandarin Chinese speakers in today's world. Current advocates would like to see its use grow considerably and are taking steps to try to make this happen. Question 14. According to the passage, what happened to the Tenth World Esperanto Congress? A. It was scheduled for 1915. B. It had 4,000 attendees. C. It never took place. D. It had attendees from 20 countries Question 15. According to the passage, Zamenhof wanted to create a universal language ______. A. to create one world culture B. to provide a more complex language C. to resolve cultural differences D. to build a name for himself Question 16. The topic of this passage is ______. A. how language can be improved B. one man's efforts to create a universal language C. a language developed in the last few years D. using language to communicate internationally Question 17. This passage would most likely be assigned reading in a course on ______. A. English grammar B. world government C. European history D. applied linguistics Question 18. It can be inferred from the passage that the Third World Congress of Esperanto took place in___ . A. 1905 B. 1909 C. 1913 D. 1907 Question 19. The paragraph following the passage most likely discusses ______. A. another of Zamenhofs accomplishment. B. attempts to reconvene the World Congress of Esperanto in the 1920s C. the disadvantages of usi:1g an artificial language. D. how current supporters of Esperanto are encouraging its growth. Question 20. Which paragraph describes the predecessor to Esperanto? A. The second paragraph B. The third paragraph C. The last paragraph D. The first paragraph Trang 2/6 - Mã đề thi 174 Question 21. The expression "ups and downs" in the last paragraph is closed in meaning to____ A. takeoffs and landings B. tops and bottoms C. floors and ceilings D. highs and lows Question 22. The expression "popping up" in the fourth paragraph could best be replaced by ______. A. shouting B. hiding C. opening D. leaping Question 23. It can be inferred from the passage that the Esperanto word malespera means ______. A. hopelessness B. hopeless C. hope D. hopeful Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 24. If you are at a loose end this weekend, I will show you round the city. A. busy B. free C. confident D. reluctant. Question 25. The government has decided that the publication of the report would be "contrary to the public interest". A. unpleasant B. agreeable C. urbane D. despicable Choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 26. English, Maths and Science are _____ subjects in the national curriculum in England. A. supportive B. public C. core D. independent Question 27. My mother is the first________ up and the last________ to bed. A. to get- to go B. to get- going C. getting- going D. getting- to go Question 28. Fee-paying schools, often called "independent schools" or "___________ schools" A. state B. secondary C. public D. primary Question 29. She accepted that she had acted _______ and mistakenly, which broke up her marriage. A. wisely B. attractively C. romantically D. unwisely Question 30. I must thank the man from ________ I got the present. A. whom B. who C. that D. which Question 31. A: Thanks very much for your help. B "_________." A. Yes, please B. that's right C. never mind D. You're welcome Question 32. The telephone _______ by Alexander Graham Bell. A. invented B. was invented C. inventing D. being invented Question 33. We always feel ________ and secure in our family. A. safe B. safeguard C. safely D. safety Question 34. A: " How much sugar do you want in your coffee?" B: " ____" A. Too much B. Little bit C. Not much D. So much Question 35. The advanced students are selected to take part ______ the annual International Olympic Competition. A. in B. at C. for D. from Question 36. Members of your family have very close relationship with each other, ________? A. don't they B. haven't they C. do they D. have they Question 37. _______the manager's suggestions were reasonable, the supervisor agreed with them. A. Although B. Until C. Even though D. Because Question 38. "He didn't understand it." - "________." Trang 3/6 - Mã đề thi 174 A. So did I B. Was he? C. Neither did I D. I did too Question 39. The man said that he _________ the following day. A. returned B. had returned C. would return D. will return Question 40. _________ includes our posture, facial expressions and gestures. A. Communication B. Verbal C. Signal D. Body language Question 41. It was _____ simple a question that everyone answered it correctly. A. such B. very C. too D. so Question 42. When I _______ to the party, Tom and David _______, and John ________. A. have come/ are dancing/ is singing B. was coming/ had danced/ singing C. came/ were dancing/ was singing D. have come/ are dancing/ is singing Question 43. Mary asked me whether I _________ the football match on TV the day before. A. watch B. had watched C. would watch D. have watched Question 44. _____ in the diet is especially important for vegetarians. A. By obtaining enough protein B. Obtaining enough protein C. They obtain enough protein D. Enough protein is obtained Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from that of the rest: Question 45. A. likes B. matches C. rises D. fixes Question 46. A. looked B. wicked C. cooked D. picked Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE Education is another area of social life in which information technology is changing the way we communicate. Today's college students may not simply sit in a lecture or a library to learn about their field. Through their computers and the wonders of virtual reality they can participate in lifelike simulated experiences. Consider the following scenario of the future of education made possible through developments in information technology. For children over the age of 10, daily attendance at schools is not compulsory. Some of the older children attend school only once or twice weekly to get tutorial support or instruction from a teacher. For the most part, pupils are encouraged to work online from home. Students must complete a minimum number of study hours per year; however, they may make up these hours by studying at home at times that suit their family schedule. They can log on early or late in the day and even join live classes in other countries. In order to ensure that each student is learning adequately, computer software will automatically monitor the number of hours a week each student studies on-line as well as that students' learning materials and assessment activities. Reports will be available for parents and teachers. The software can then identify the best learning activities and condition for each individual student and generate similar activities. It can also identify areas of weak achievement and produce special programs adjusted to the students' needs. Question 47. The word encouraged in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. Allowed B. stimulated C. Permitted D. Suggested Question 48. How many times are children who are older than 10 required to go to school weekly? A. once or twice B. three times C. notime D. four times Trang 4/6 - Mã đề thi 174 Question 49. What is NOT MENTIONED as a benefit of information technology to the students? A. Students' learning time won't be monitored. B. Students' weak achievement can be identified. C. Students can learn at times that suit their schedule. D. Students can stay at home to learn. Question 50. The word adequately in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. consequently B. significantly C. Suitably D. suficiently Question 51. What is the topic of the passage? A. Students don't have to go to school any more. B. The effect of information technology on education. C. Computer software will make sure students learn at home. D. Students can know about their weak aspects to focus. Question 52. Who/What counts the number of hours per week that students spend learning? A. Parents B. Virtual reality C. Computer software D. Teacher Question 53. What CAN'T the software do? A. Monitor the time the students learn. B. Design materials for the students C. Find out the best activities for the students. D. Identify weaknesses of the students. Question 54. The word suit in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. show up B. distub C. fit D. enhance Question 55. The pronoun "it" in paragraph 1 refers to ___________ A. learning activities B. The software C. condition D. Individual student Question 56. The pronoun "They" in paragraph 1 refers to ________ A. college students B. The lectures C. the wonders of virtual reality D. The computers Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 57. Where I am living now is convenient for work because I don't have travel far. A. Where I am B. is convenient C. have travel far D. for work because I don't Question 58. Mary found it hard to concentrate on her work because the noise. A. to concentrate B. work C. it hard D. because the noise Question 59. I'll make some sandwiches before I'll leave for work. A. I'll make B. some sandwiches before C. I'll leave D. for work Question 60. She washes her hair at least six time a week A. washes her hair B. at least six C. a week D. time Question 61. The reason why he's not feeling very well is simple - he's ate too much as usual. A. he's not feeling B. is simple C. he's ate D. as usual Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is CLOSET in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 62. Professor Smith was very interested in the diversity of cultures all over the world. A. changes B. conservation C. difference D. variety Question 63. I didn't think his comments were very appropriate at the time. A. correct B. suitable C. right D. exact Trang 5/6 - Mã đề thi 174 Question 64. When you are in a restaurant, you can raise your hand slightly to show that you need assistance. A. help B. food C. bill D. menu SECTION B: WRITING Part 1: Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. 1. I started learning English five years ago. I have ................................................................................................................................. 2. They said that Paula had quit five jobs before working for us. Paula……………………………………………………………………………………... 3. “Don’t forget to lock the door before you go out”, his mother said . His mother ……………………………………………………………………………… 4. If you don’t study hard, you will not be able to pass the final exam. Unless..………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. “ Let’s go to the cinema tonight” he said. He suggested……………………………………………………………………………… Part 2: In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the advantages of learning English well. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet. The following prompts might be helpful to you. - Communicating with people from other countries - Widening knowledge about other cultures - Getting good job in the future - ….. ________________________HẾT_________________________ Thí sinh không được sử dụng tài liệu. Cán bộ coi thi không giải thích gì thêm. Họ và tên thí sinh: …………………………………….., Số báo danh: …………….. Trang 6/6 - Mã đề thi 174 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC 2 ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 NĂM HỌC 2015 - 2016 Môn: Tiếng Anh, Khối: 12 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Không kể thời gian phát đề) Đề thi gồm: 06 trang Mã đề: 208 SECTION A: MULTIPLE CHOICE. Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE Education is another area of social life in which information technology is changing the way we communicate. Today's college students may not simply sit in a lecture or a library to learn about their field. Through their computers and the wonders of virtual reality they can participate in lifelike simulated experiences. Consider the following scenario of the future of education made possible through developments in information technology. For children over the age of 10, daily attendance at schools is not compulsory. Some of the older children attend school only once or twice weekly to get tutorial support or instruction from a teacher. For the most part, pupils are encouraged to work online from home. Students must complete a minimum number of study hours per year; however, they may make up these hours by studying at home at times that suit their family schedule. They can log on early or late in the day and even join live classes in other countries. In order to ensure that each student is learning adequately, computer software will automatically monitor the number of hours a week each student studies on-line as well as that students' learning materials and assessment activities. Reports will be available for parents and teachers. The software can then identify the best learning activities and condition for each individual student and generate similar activities. It can also identify areas of weak achievement and produce special programs adjusted to the students' needs. Question 1. The word encouraged in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. Permitted B. Allowed C. Suggested D. stimulated Question 2. The pronoun "it" in paragraph 1 refers to ___________ A. Individual student B. The software C. condition D. learning activities Question 3. What is NOT MENTIONED as a benefit of information technology to the students? A. Students' weak achievement can be identified. B. Students can stay at home to learn. C. Students' learning time won't be monitored. D. Students can learn at times that suit their schedule. Question 4. The word adequately in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. Suitably B. consequently C. suficiently D. significantly Question 5. The pronoun "They" in paragraph 1 refers to ________ A. college students B. the wonders of virtual reality C. The lectures D. The computers Question 6. The word suit in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. show up B. enhance C. fit D. distub Trang 1/6 - Mã đề thi 208 Question 7. What CAN'T the software do? A. Find out the best activities for the students. B. Identify weaknesses of the students. C. Monitor the time the students learn. D. Design materials for the students Question 8. Who/What counts the number of hours per week that students spend learning? A. Parents B. Virtual reality C. Computer software D. Teacher Question 9. What is the topic of the passage? A. The effect of information technology on education. B. Students can know about their weak aspects to focus. C. students don't have to go to school any more. D. Computer software will make sure students learn at home. Question 10. How many times are children who are older than 10 required to go to school weekly? A. three times B. once or twice C. four times D. notime Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from that of the others: Question 11. A. examination B. university C. sociology D. geographical Question 12. A. ceremony B. maintain C. engage D. majority Question 13. A. sacrifice B. romantic C. marriage D. conical Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from that of the rest: Question 14. A. wicked B. looked C. picked D. cooked Question 15. A. matches B. rises C. fixes D. likes Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 16. Mary found it hard to concentrate on her work because the noise. A. because the noise B. to concentrate C. work D. it hard Question 17. She washes her hair at least six time a week A. at least six B. time C. a week D. washes her hair Question 18. The reason why he's not feeling very well is simple - he's ate too much as usual. A. is simple B. he's ate C. he's not feeling D. as usual Question 19. I'll make some sandwiches before I'll leave for work. A. for work B. I'll make C. I'll leave D. some sandwiches before Question 20. Where I am living now is convenient for work because I don't have travel far. A. is convenient B. for work because I don't C. have travel far D. Where I am Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: THE OPEN UNIVERSITY The Open University was created in 1968 to give people who cannot afford (21)_______ attend regular courses of study, the opportunity of studying and (22)_______ a university diploma or degree. They study at home and their academic performance is assessed by (23)_______ of written examinations or project work. Most Open University students (24)_______ in study while also holding down a job or coping with a busy home life. They study in order to update their job skills or for personal (25)_______ . At the heart of most courses is a (26)_______ of specially written and professionally printed textbooks and workbooks which students receive by post. On many of the courses, students are expected to watch television programmes on the BBC network, (27)_______ are usually Trang 2/6 - Mã đề thi 208 broadcast in the (28)_______ hours of the morning. The (29)_______ of these programmes is to develop and broaden the study experience, (30)_______ students do not have to rely only on the printed material they are sent. Question 21. A. to B. for C. in D. with Question 22. A. obtain B. obtaining C. obtained D. to obtain Question 23. A. route B. means C. method D. system Question 24. A. take B. join C. put D. fit Question 25. A. satisfaction B. satisfying C. satisfied D. satisfactory Question 26. A. unit B. club C. set D. heap Question 27. A. that B. what C. who D. which Question 28. A. first B. initial C. starting D. early Question 29. A. aim B. cause C. reason D. end Question 30. A. however B. so that C. even though D. although Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: Esperanto is what is called a planned, or artificial language. It was created more than a century ago by Polish eye doctor Ludwik Lazar Zamenhof. Zamenhof believed that a common language would help to alleviate some of the misunderstandings among cultures. In Zamenhofs first attempt at a universal language, he tried to create a language that was as uncomplicated as possible. This first language included words such as ab, ac, ba, eb, be, and ce. This did not result in a workable language in that these monosyllabic words. though short, were not easy to understand or to retain Next, Zamenhof tried a different way of constructing a simplified language. He made the words in his language sound like words that people already knew, but he simplified the grammar tremendously. One example of how he simplified the language can be seen in the suffixes: all nouns in this language end in 0, as in the noun amiko, which means "friend," and all adjectives end in -a, as in the adjective bela, which means "pretty." Another example of the simplified language can be seen in the prefix mal-, which makes a word opposite in meaning; the word malamiko therefore means "enemy," and the word malbela therefore means "ugly" in Zamenhofs language. In 1887, Zamenhof wrote a description of this language and published it. He used a pen name, Dr. Esperanto, when signing the book. He selected the name Esperanto because this word means "a person who hopes" in his language. Esperanto clubs began popping up throughout Europe and by1905, Esperanto had spread from Europe to America and Asia. In 1905, the First World Congress of Esperanto took place in France, with approximately 700 attendees from 20 different countries. Congresses were held annually for nine years, and 4,000 attendees were registered for the Tenth World Esperanto Congress scheduled for 1914, when World War I erupted and forced its cancellation. Esperanto has had its ups and downs in the period since World War I. Today, years after it was introduced, it is estimated that perhaps a quarter of a million people are fluent in it. This may seem like a large number, but it is really quite small when compared with the billion English speakers and billion Mandarin Chinese speakers in today's world. Current advocates would like to see its use grow considerably and are taking steps to try to make this happen. Question 31. The paragraph following the passage most likely discusses ______. A. another of Zamenhofs accomplishment. B. the disadvantages of usi:1g an artificial language. C. how current supporters of Esperanto are encouraging its growth. D. attempts to reconvene the World Congress of Esperanto in the 1920s Trang 3/6 - Mã đề thi 208 Question 32. It can be inferred from the passage that the Esperanto word malespera means ______. A. hopeful B. hopelessness C. hope D. hopeless Question 33. It can be inferred from the passage that the Third World Congress of Esperanto took place in___ . A. 1907 B. 1909 C. 1905 D. 1913 Question 34. The expression "popping up" in the fourth paragraph could best be replaced by ______. A. shouting B. opening C. hiding D. leaping Question 35. According to the passage, Zamenhof wanted to create a universal language ______. A. to build a name for himself B. to provide a more complex language C. to resolve cultural differences D. to create one world culture Question 36. The topic of this passage is ______. A. one man's efforts to create a universal language B. how language can be improved C. a language developed in the last few years D. using language to communicate internationally Question 37. Which paragraph describes the predecessor to Esperanto? A. The first paragraph B. The third paragraph C. The second paragraph D. The last paragraph Question 38. This passage would most likely be assigned reading in a course on ______. A. world government B. applied linguistics C. European history D. English grammar Question 39. The expression "ups and downs" in the last paragraph is closed in meaning to__________ A. tops and bottoms B. takeoffs and landings C. floors and ceilings D. highs and lows Question 40. According to the passage, what happened to the Tenth World Esperanto Congress? A. It had attendees from 20 countries B. It was scheduled for 1915. C. It never took place. D. It had 4,000 attendees. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 41. If you are at a loose end this weekend, I will show you round the city. A. reluctant. B. busy C. confident D. free Question 42. The government has decided that the publication of the report would be "contrary to the public interest". A. despicable B. unpleasant C. urbane D. agreeable Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is CLOSET in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 43. Professor Smith was very interested in the diversity of cultures all over the world. A. changes B. variety C. difference D. conservation Question 44. I didn't think his comments were very appropriate at the time. A. correct B. exact C. suitable D. right Trang 4/6 - Mã đề thi 208 Question 45. When you are in a restaurant, you can raise your hand slightly to show that you need assistance. A. bill B. menu C. help D. food Choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 46. Mary asked me whether I _________ the football match on TV the day before. A. had watched B. watch C. would watch D. have watched Question 47. We always feel ________ and secure in our family. A. safe B. safeguard C. safety D. safely Question 48. I must thank the man from ________ I got the present. A. that B. which C. who D. whom Question 49. _________ includes our posture, facial expressions and gestures. A. Communication B. Body language C. Signal D. Verbal Question 50. The telephone _______ by Alexander Graham Bell. A. being invented B. invented C. inventing D. was invented Question 51. Members of your family have very close relationship with each other, ________? A. haven't they B. have they C. don't they D. do they Question 52. "He didn't understand it." - "________." A. Was he? B. So did I C. I did too D. Neither did I Question 53. A: Thanks very much for your help. B "_________." A. You're welcome B. Yes, please C. that's right D. never mind Question 54. It was _____ simple a question that everyone answered it correctly. A. so B. very C. too D. such Question 55. The man said that he _________ the following day. A. will return B. returned C. would return D. had returned Question 56. Fee-paying schools, often called "independent schools" or "___________ schools" A. secondary B. primary C. state D. public Question 57. The advanced students are selected to take part ______ the annual International Olympic Competition. A. from B. for C. in D. at Question 58. My mother is the first________ up and the last________ to bed. A. to get- going B. getting- going C. getting- to go D. to get- to go Question 59. A: " How much sugar do you want in your coffee?" B: " ____" A. Little bit B. Too much C. So much D. Not much Question 60. When I _______ to the party, Tom and David _______, and John ________. A. came/ were dancing/ was singing B. was coming/ had danced/ singing C. have come/ are dancing/ is singing D. have come/ are dancing/ is singing Question 61. _____ in the diet is especially important for vegetarians. A. They obtain enough protein B. Obtaining enough protein C. By obtaining enough protein D. Enough protein is obtained Question 62. _______the manager's suggestions were reasonable, the supervisor agreed with them. A. Although B. Even though C. Until D. Because Question 63. English, Maths and Science are _____ subjects in the national curriculum in England. Trang 5/6 - Mã đề thi 208 A. independent B. supportive C. public D. core Question 64. She accepted that she had acted _______ and mistakenly, which broke up her marriage. A. romantically B. unwisely C. attractively D. wisely SECTION B: WRITING Part 1: Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. 1. I started learning English five years ago. I have ................................................................................................................................. 2. They said that Paula had quit five jobs before working for us. Paula……………………………………………………………………………………... 3. “Don’t forget to lock the door before you go out”, his mother said . His mother ……………………………………………………………………………… 4. If you don’t study hard, you will not be able to pass the final exam. Unless..………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. “ Let’s go to the cinema tonight” he said. He suggested……………………………………………………………………………… Part 2: In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the advantages of learning English well. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet. The following prompts might be helpful to you. - Communicating with people from other countries - Widening knowledge about other cultures - Getting good job in the future - ….. ____________________ HẾT ___________________ Thí sinh không được sử dụng tài liệu. Cán bộ coi thi không giải thích gì thêm. Họ và tên thí sinh: …………………………………….., Số báo danh: …………….. Trang 6/6 - Mã đề thi 208 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC 2 ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 NĂM HỌC 2015 - 2016 Môn: Tiếng Anh, Khối: 12 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Không kể thời gian phát đề) Đề thi gồm: 06 trang Mã đề: 242 SECTION A: MULTIPLE CHOICE. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 1. If you are at a loose end this weekend, I will show you round the city. A. confident B. busy C. reluctant. D. free Question 2. The government has decided that the publication of the report would be "contrary to the public interest". A. despicable B. agreeable C. unpleasant D. urbane Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE Education is another area of social life in which information technology is changing the way we communicate. Today's college students may not simply sit in a lecture or a library to learn about their field. Through their computers and the wonders of virtual reality they can participate in lifelike simulated experiences. Consider the following scenario of the future of education made possible through developments in information technology. For children over the age of 10, daily attendance at schools is not compulsory. Some of the older children attend school only once or twice weekly to get tutorial support or instruction from a teacher. For the most part, pupils are encouraged to work online from home. Students must complete a minimum number of study hours per year; however, they may make up these hours by studying at home at times that suit their family schedule. They can log on early or late in the day and even join live classes in other countries. In order to ensure that each student is learning adequately, computer software will automatically monitor the number of hours a week each student studies on-line as well as that students' learning materials and assessment activities. Reports will be available for parents and teachers. The software can then identify the best learning activities and condition for each individual student and generate similar activities. It can also identify areas of weak achievement and produce special programs adjusted to the students' needs. Question 3. What is NOT MENTIONED as a benefit of information technology to the students? A. Students can stay at home to learn. B. Students can learn at times that suit their schedule. C. Students' learning time won't be monitored. D. Students' weak achievement can be identified. Question 4. The word suit in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. fit B. show up C. enhance D. distub Question 5. How many times are children who are older than 10 required to go to school weekly? Trang 1/6 - Mã đề thi 242 A. notime B. four times C. three times D. once or twice Question 6. Who/What counts the number of hours per week that students spend learning? A. Virtual reality B. Parents C. Computer software D. Teacher Question 7. The pronoun "They" in paragraph 1 refers to ________ A. The lectures B. the wonders of virtual reality C. college students D. The computers Question 8. The word encouraged in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. Permitted B. Suggested C. Allowed D. stimulated Question 9. The word adequately in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. significantly B. consequently C. Suitably D. suficiently Question 10. What is the topic of the passage? A. students don't have to go to school any more. B. Students can know about their weak aspects to focus. C. Computer software will make sure students learn at home. D. The effect of information technology on education. Question 11. The pronoun "it" in paragraph 1 refers to ___________ A. learning activities B. The software C. Condition D. Individual student Question 12. What CAN'T the software do? A. Monitor the time the students learn. B. Find out the best activities for the students. C. Design materials for the students D. Identify weaknesses of the students. Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: Esperanto is what is called a planned, or artificial language. It was created more than a century ago by Polish eye doctor Ludwik Lazar Zamenhof. Zamenhof believed that a common language would help to alleviate some of the misunderstandings among cultures. In Zamenhofs first attempt at a universal language, he tried to create a language that was as uncomplicated as possible. This first language included words such as ab, ac, ba, eb, be, and ce. This did not result in a workable language in that these monosyllabic words. though short, were not easy to understand or to retain Next, Zamenhof tried a different way of constructing a simplified language. He made the words in his language sound like words that people already knew, but he simplified the grammar tremendously. One example of how he simplified the language can be seen in the suffixes: all nouns in this language end in 0, as in the noun amiko, which means "friend," and all adjectives end in -a, as in the adjective bela, which means "pretty." Another example of the simplified language can be seen in the prefix mal-, which makes a word opposite in meaning; the word malamiko therefore means "enemy," and the word malbela therefore means "ugly" in Zamenhofs language. In 1887, Zamenhof wrote a description of this language and published it. He used a pen name, Dr. Esperanto, when signing the book. He selected the name Esperanto because this word means "a person who hopes" in his language. Esperanto clubs began popping up throughout Europe and by1905, Esperanto had spread from Europe to America and Asia. In 1905, the First World Congress of Esperanto took place in France, with approximately 700 attendees from 20 different countries. Congresses were held annually for nine years, and 4,000 attendees were registered for the Tenth World Esperanto Congress scheduled for 1914, when World War I erupted and forced its cancellation. Esperanto has had its ups and downs in the period since World War I. Today, years after it was introduced, it is estimated that perhaps a quarter of a million people are fluent in it. This may seem like a large number, but it is really quite small when compared with the billion English Trang 2/6 - Mã đề thi 242 speakers and billion Mandarin Chinese speakers in today's world. Current advocates would like to see its use grow considerably and are taking steps to try to make this happen. Question 13. This passage would most likely be assigned reading in a course on ______. A. applied linguistics B. world government C. English grammar D. European history Question 14. The expression "ups and downs" in the last paragraph is closed in meaning to________ A. takeoffs and landings B. highs and lows C. floors and ceilings D. tops and bottoms Question 15. According to the passage, Zamenhof wanted to create a universal language ______. A. to build a name for himself B. to provide a more complex language C. to create one world culture D. to resolve cultural differences Question 16. It can be inferred from the passage that the Esperanto word malespera means ______. A. hopeless B. hopelessness C. hope D. hopeful Question 17. The topic of this passage is ______. A. one man's efforts to create a universal language B. using language to communicate internationally C. a language developed in the last few years D. how language can be improved Question 18. The paragraph following the passage most likely discusses ______. A. another of Zamenhofs accomplishment. B. how current supporters of Esperanto are encouraging its growth. C. attempts to reconvene the World Congress of Esperanto in the 1920s D. the disadvantages of usi:1g an artificial language. Question 19. According to the passage, what happened to the Tenth World Esperanto Congress? A. It never took place. B. It was scheduled for 1915. C. It had 4,000 attendees. D. It had attendees from 20 countries Question 20. It can be inferred from the passage that the Third World Congress of Esperanto took place in___ . A. 1913 B. 1905 C. 1909 D. 1907 Question 21. The expression "popping up" in the fourth paragraph could best be replaced by ______. A. opening B. shouting C. leaping D. hiding Question 22. Which paragraph describes the predecessor to Esperanto? A. The third paragraph B. The first paragraph C. The second paragraph D. The last paragraph Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is CLOSET in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 23. Professor Smith was very interested in the diversity of cultures all over the world. A. variety B. conservation C. changes D. difference Question 24. When you are in a restaurant, you can raise your hand slightly to show that you need assistance. A. bill B. menu C. help D. food Question 25. I didn't think his comments were very appropriate at the time. A. correct B. suitable C. right D. exact Trang 3/6 - Mã đề thi 242 Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from that of the rest: Question 26. A. fixes B. rises C. likes D. matches Question 27. A. looked B. wicked C. cooked D. picked Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: THE OPEN UNIVERSITY The Open University was created in 1968 to give people who cannot afford (28)_______ attend regular courses of study, the opportunity of studying and (29)_______ a university diploma or degree. They study at home and their academic performance is assessed by (30)_______ of written examinations or project work. Most Open University students (31)_______ in study while also holding down a job or coping with a busy home life. They study in order to update their job skills or for personal (32)_______ . At the heart of most courses is a (33)_______ of specially written and professionally printed textbooks and workbooks which students receive by post. On many of the courses, students are expected to watch television programmes on the BBC network, (34)_______ are usually broadcast in the (35)_______ hours of the morning. The (36)_______ of these programmes is to develop and broaden the study experience, (37)_______ students do not have to rely only on the printed material they are sent. Question 28. A. with B. to C. for D. in Question 29. A. obtained B. obtaining C. obtain D. to obtain Question 30. A. route B. means C. system D. method Question 31. A. join B. put C. take D. fit Question 32. A. satisfactory B. satisfied C. satisfaction D. satisfying Question 33. A. unit B. club C. set D. heap Question 34. A. what B. which C. that D. who Question 35. A. starting B. first C. initial D. early Question 36. A. aim B. reason C. cause D. end Question 37. A. although B. even though C. however D. so that Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from that of the others: Question 38. A. conical B. romantic C. marriage D. sacrifice Question 39. A. engage B. ceremony C. majority D. maintain Question 40. A. examination B. sociology C. geographical D. university Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 41. Where I am living now is convenient for work because I don't have travel far. A. for work because I don't B. is convenient C. have travel far D. Where I am Question 42. The reason why he's not feeling very well is simple - he's ate too much as usual. A. as usual B. he's not feeling C. is simple D. he's ate Question 43. She washes her hair at least six time a week A. at least six B. washes her hair C. time D. a week Question 44. I'll make some sandwiches before I'll leave for work. A. I'll make B. for work C. some sandwiches before D. I'll leave Question 45. Mary found it hard to concentrate on her work because the noise. A. it hard B. because the noise C. work D. to concentrate Trang 4/6 - Mã đề thi 242 Choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 46. English, Maths and Science are _____ subjects in the national curriculum in England. A. core B. public C. independent D. supportive Question 47. "He didn't understand it." - "________." A. I did too B. Was he? C. So did I D. Neither did I Question 48. We always feel ________ and secure in our family. A. safe B. safely C. safeguard D. safety Question 49. Members of your family have very close relationship with each other, ________? A. don't they B. haven't they C. have they D. do they Question 50. The telephone _______ by Alexander Graham Bell. A. being invented B. invented C. inventing D. was invented Question 51. She accepted that she had acted _______ and mistakenly, which broke up her marriage. A. wisely B. attractively C. romantically D. unwisely Question 52. A: " How much sugar do you want in your coffee?" B: " ____" A. So much B. Little bit C. Not much D. Too much Question 53. _______the manager's suggestions were reasonable, the supervisor agreed with them. A. Until B. Even though C. Although D. Because Question 54. My mother is the first________ up and the last________ to bed. A. getting- to go B. to get- going C. to get- to go D. getting- going Question 55. The advanced students are selected to take part ______ the annual International Olympic Competition. A. for B. at C. from D. in Question 56. Fee-paying schools, often called "independent schools" or "___________ schools" A. secondary B. state C. public D. primary Question 57. A: Thanks very much for your help. B "_________." A. that's right B. Yes, please C. You're welcome D. never mind Question 58. When I _______ to the party, Tom and David _______, and John ________. A. came/ were dancing/ was singing B. was coming/ had danced/ singing C. have come/ are dancing/ is singing D. have come/ are dancing/ is singing Question 59. _________ includes our posture, facial expressions and gestures. A. Body language B. Signal C. Verbal D. Communication Question 60. It was _____ simple a question that everyone answered it correctly. A. too B. very C. such D. so Question 61. _____ in the diet is especially important for vegetarians. A. Obtaining enough protein B. Enough protein is obtained C. By obtaining enough protein D. They obtain enough protein Question 62. I must thank the man from ________ I got the present. A. that B. which C. whom D. who Question 63. The man said that he _________ the following day. A. returned B. would return C. had returned D. will return Question 64. Mary asked me whether I _________ the football match on TV the day before. A. watch B. had watched C. have watched D. would watch SECTION B: WRITING Part 1: Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Trang 5/6 - Mã đề thi 242 1. I started learning English five years ago. I have ................................................................................................................................. 2. They said that Paula had quit five jobs before working for us. Paula……………………………………………………………………………………... 3. “Don’t forget to lock the door before you go out”, his mother said . His mother ……………………………………………………………………………… 4. If you don’t study hard, you will not be able to pass the final exam. Unless..………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. “ Let’s go to the cinema tonight” he said. He suggested……………………………………………………………………………… Part 2: In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the advantages of learning English well. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet. The following prompts might be helpful to you. - Communicating with people from other countries - Widening knowledge about other cultures - Getting good job in the future - ….. ____________________ HẾT ___________________ Thí sinh không được sử dụng tài liệu. Cán bộ coi thi không giải thích gì thêm. Họ và tên thí sinh: …………………………………….., Số báo danh: …………….. Trang 6/6 - Mã đề thi 242 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC 2 ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 NĂM HỌC 2015 - 2016 Môn: Tiếng Anh, Khối: 12 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Không kể thời gian phát đề) Đề thi gồm: 06 trang Mã đề: 276 SECTION A: MULTIPLE CHOICE. Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from that of the others: Question 1. A. ceremony B. majority C. engage D. maintain Question 2. A. marriage B. romantic C. sacrifice D. conical Question 3. A. sociology B. university C. examination D. geographical Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: THE OPEN UNIVERSITY The Open University was created in 1968 to give people who cannot afford (4)_______ attend regular courses of study, the opportunity of studying and (5)_______ a university diploma or degree. They study at home and their academic performance is assessed by (6)_______ of written examinations or project work. Most Open University students (7)_______ in study while also holding down a job or coping with a busy home life. They study in order to update their job skills or for personal (8)_______ . At the heart of most courses is a (9)_______ of specially written and professionally printed textbooks and workbooks which students receive by post. On many of the courses, students are expected to watch television programmes on the BBC network, (10)_______ are usually broadcast in the (11)_______ hours of the morning. The (12)_______ of these programmes is to develop and broaden the study experience, (13)_______ students do not have to rely only on the printed material they are sent. Question 4. A. in B. to C. for D. with Question 5. A. obtained B. obtain C. to obtain D. obtaining Question 6. A. means B. system C. method D. route Question 7. A. put B. take C. join D. fit Question 8. A. satisfactory B. satisfying C. satisfied D. satisfaction Question 9. A. unit B. heap C. club D. set Question 10. A. which B. that C. who D. what Question 11. A. early B. first C. initial D. starting Question 12. A. aim B. cause C. end D. reason Question 13. A. although B. so that C. however D. even though Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 14. If you are at a loose end this weekend, I will show you round the city. A. reluctant. B. free C. confident D. busy Question 15. The government has decided that the publication of the report would be "contrary to the public interest". A. urbane B. agreeable C. despicable D. unpleasant Trang 1/6 - Mã đề thi 276 Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 16. She washes her hair at least six time a week A. time B. at least six C. a week D. washes her hair Question 17. Where I am living now is convenient for work because I don't have travel far. A. is convenient B. have travel far C. Where I am D. for work because I don't Question 18. The reason why he's not feeling very well is simple - he's ate too much as usual. A. he's ate B. is simple C. as usual D. he's not feeling Question 19. I'll make some sandwiches before I'll leave for work. A. for work B. I'll make C. I'll leave D. some sandwiches before Question 20. Mary found it hard to concentrate on her work because the noise. A. because the noise B. work C. to concentrate D. it hard Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from that of the rest: Question 21. A. picked B. looked C. cooked D. wicked Question 22. A. fixes B. matches C. likes D. rises Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is CLOSET in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 23. When you are in a restaurant, you can raise your hand slightly to show that you need assistance. A. bill B. help C. menu D. food Question 24. I didn't think his comments were very appropriate at the time. A. right B. exact C. suitable D. correct Question 25. Professor Smith was very interested in the diversity of cultures all over the world. A. changes B. difference C. conservation D. variety Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE Education is another area of social life in which information technology is changing the way we communicate. Today's college students may not simply sit in a lecture or a library to learn about their field. Through their computers and the wonders of virtual reality they can participate in lifelike simulated experiences. Consider the following scenario of the future of education made possible through developments in information technology. For children over the age of 10, daily attendance at schools is not compulsory. Some of the older children attend school only once or twice weekly to get tutorial support or instruction from a teacher. For the most part, pupils are encouraged to work online from home. Students must complete a minimum number of study hours per year; however, they may make up these hours by studying at home at times that suit their family schedule. They can log on early or late in the day and even join live classes in other countries. In order to ensure that each student is learning adequately, computer software will automatically monitor the number of hours a week each student studies on-line as well as that students' learning materials and assessment activities. Reports will be available for parents and teachers. The software can then identify the best learning activities and condition for each individual student and generate similar activities. It can also identify areas of weak achievement and produce special programs adjusted to the students' needs. Trang 2/6 - Mã đề thi 276 Question 26. The pronoun "it" in paragraph 1 refers to ___________ A. The software B. Individual student C. learning activities D. condition Question 27. What CAN'T the software do? A. Design materials for the students B. Find out the best activities for the students. C. Monitor the time the students learn. D. Identify weaknesses of the students. Question 28. The pronoun "They" in paragraph 1 refers to ________ A. The computers B. The lectures C. the wonders of virtual reality D. college students Question 29. How many times are children who are older than 10 required to go to school weekly? A. four times B. notime C. three times D. once or twice Question 30. What is NOT MENTIONED as a benefit of information technology to the students? A. Students' weak achievement can be identified. B. Students' learning time won't be monitored. C. Students can stay at home to learn. D. Students can learn at times that suit their schedule. Question 31. What is the topic of the passage? A. Computer software will make sure students learn at home. B. students don't have to go to school any more. C. Students can know about their weak aspects to focus. D. The effect of information technology on education. Question 32. The word adequately in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. suficiently B.consequently C. Suitably D. significantly Question 33. The word suit in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. show up B. distub C. fit D. enhance Question 34. The word encouraged in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. stimulated B. Allowed C. Suggested D. Permitted Question 35. Who/What counts the number of hours per week that students spend learning? A. Teacher B. Virtual reality C. Computer software D. Parents Choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 36. _____ in the diet is especially important for vegetarians. A. They obtain enough protein B. Enough protein is obtained C. Obtaining enough protein D. By obtaining enough protein Question 37. It was _____ simple a question that everyone answered it correctly. A. very B. such C. so D. too Question 38. Fee-paying schools, often called "independent schools" or "___________ schools" A. state B. public C. secondary D. primary Question 39. When I _______ to the party, Tom and David _______, and John ________. A. was coming/ had danced/ singing B. came/ were dancing/ was singing C. have come/ are dancing/ is singing D. have come/ are dancing/ is singing Question 40. We always feel ________ and secure in our family. A. safety B. safely C. safeguard D. safe Question 41. My mother is the first________ up and the last________ to bed. A. getting- going B. to get- to go C. getting- to go D. to get- going Question 42. The man said that he _________ the following day. Trang 3/6 - Mã đề thi 276 A. would return B. returned C. will return D. had returned Question 43. I must thank the man from ________ I got the present. A. whom B. who C. that D. which Question 44. The telephone _______ by Alexander Graham Bell. A. was invented B. inventing C. being invented D. invented Question 45. _________ includes our posture, facial expressions and gestures. A. Communication B. Signal C. Body language D. Verbal Question 46. A: Thanks very much for your help. B "_________." A. that's right B. You're welcome C. Yes, please D. never mind Question 47. "He didn't understand it." - "________." A. So did I B. I did too C. Was he? D. Neither did I Question 48. The advanced students are selected to take part ______ the annual International Olympic Competition. A. for B. from C. in D. at Question 49. Mary asked me whether I _________ the football match on TV the day before. A. have watched B. would watch C. had watched D. watch Question 50. English, Maths and Science are _____ subjects in the national curriculum in England. A. supportive B. core C. public D. independent Question 51. She accepted that she had acted _______ and mistakenly, which broke up her marriage. A. romantically B. wisely C. unwisely D. attractively Question 52. A: " How much sugar do you want in your coffee?" B: " ____" A. Little bit B. Not much C. So much D. Too much Question 53. _______the manager's suggestions were reasonable, the supervisor agreed with them. A. Although B. Until C. Even though D. Because Question 54. Members of your family have very close relationship with each other, ________? A. haven't they B. do they C. have they D. don't they Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: Esperanto is what is called a planned, or artificial language. It was created more than a century ago by Polish eye doctor Ludwik Lazar Zamenhof. Zamenhof believed that a common language would help to alleviate some of the misunderstandings among cultures. In Zamenhofs first attempt at a universal language, he tried to create a language that was as uncomplicated as possible. This first language included words such as ab, ac, ba, eb, be, and ce. This did not result in a workable language in that these monosyllabic words. though short, were not easy to understand or to retain Next, Zamenhof tried a different way of constructing a simplified language. He made the words in his language sound like words that people already knew, but he simplified the grammar tremendously. One example of how he simplified the language can be seen in the suffixes: all nouns in this language end in 0, as in the noun amiko, which means "friend," and all adjectives end in -a, as in the adjective bela, which means "pretty." Another example of the simplified language can be seen in the prefix mal-, which makes a word opposite in meaning; the word malamiko therefore means "enemy," and the word malbela therefore means "ugly" in Zamenhofs language. In 1887, Zamenhof wrote a description of this language and published it. He used a pen name, Dr. Esperanto, when signing the book. He selected the name Esperanto because this word Trang 4/6 - Mã đề thi 276 means "a person who hopes" in his language. Esperanto clubs began popping up throughout Europe and by1905, Esperanto had spread from Europe to America and Asia. In 1905, the First World Congress of Esperanto took place in France, with approximately 700 attendees from 20 different countries. Congresses were held annually for nine years, and 4,000 attendees were registered for the Tenth World Esperanto Congress scheduled for 1914, when World War I erupted and forced its cancellation. Esperanto has had its ups and downs in the period since World War I. Today, years after it was introduced, it is estimated that perhaps a quarter of a million people are fluent in it. This may seem like a large number, but it is really quite small when compared with the billion English speakers and billion Mandarin Chinese speakers in today's world. Current advocates would like to see its use grow considerably and are taking steps to try to make this happen. Question 55. This passage would most likely be assigned reading in a course on ______. A. European history B. world government C. applied linguistics D. English grammar Question 56. The topic of this passage is ______. A. a language developed in the last few years B. using language to communicate internationally C. one man's efforts to create a universal language D. how language can be improved Question 57. It can be inferred from the passage that the Third World Congress of Esperanto took place in___ . A. 1909 B. 1905 C. 1913 D. 1907 Question 58. According to the passage, what happened to the Tenth World Esperanto Congress? A. It had 4,000 attendees. B. It never took place. C. It was scheduled for 1915. D. It had attendees from 20 countries Question 59. The expression "ups and downs" in the last paragraph is closed in meaning to____ A. highs and lows B. takeoffs and landings C. floors and ceilings D. tops and bottoms Question 60. The expression "popping up" in the fourth paragraph could best be replaced by ______. A. hiding B. opening C. leaping D. shouting Question 61. Which paragraph describes the predecessor to Esperanto? A. The third paragraph B. The last paragraph C. The first paragraph D. The second paragraph Question 62. The paragraph following the passage most likely discusses ______. A. the disadvantages of usi:1g an artificial language. B. attempts to reconvene the World Congress of Esperanto in the 1920s C. how current supporters of Esperanto are encouraging its growth. D. another of Zamenhofs accomplishment. Question 63. According to the passage, Zamenhof wanted to create a universal language ______. A. to provide a more complex language B. to resolve cultural differences C. to build a name for himself D. to create one world culture Question 64. It can be inferred from the passage that the Esperanto word malespera means ______. A. hopeful B. hope C. hopelessness D. hopeless Trang 5/6 - Mã đề thi 276 SECTION B: WRITING Part 1: Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. 1. I started learning English five years ago. I have ................................................................................................................................. 2. They said that Paula had quit five jobs before working for us. Paula……………………………………………………………………………………... 3. “Don’t forget to lock the door before you go out”, his mother said . His mother ……………………………………………………………………………… 4. If you don’t study hard, you will not be able to pass the final exam. Unless..………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. “ Let’s go to the cinema tonight” he said. He suggested……………………………………………………………………………… Part 2: In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the advantages of learning English well. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet. The following prompts might be helpful to you. - Communicating with people from other countries - Widening knowledge about other cultures - Getting good job in the future - ….. ____________________ HẾT ___________________ Thí sinh không được sử dụng tài liệu. Cán bộ coi thi không giải thích gì thêm. Họ và tên thí sinh: …………………………………….., Số báo danh: …………….. Trang 6/6 - Mã đề thi 276 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC 2 ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 NĂM HỌC 2015 - 2016 Môn: Tiếng Anh, Khối: 12 Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Không kể thời gian phát đề) Đề thi gồm: 06 trang Mã đề: 310 SECTION A: MULTIPLE CHOICE. Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from that of the others: Question 1. A. sacrifice B. conical C. marriage D. romantic Question 2. A. maintain B. ceremony C. engage D. majority Question 3. A. sociology B. university C. examination D. geographical Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from that of the rest: Question 4. A. matches B. likes C. rises D. fixes Question 5. A. wicked B. looked C. cooked D. picked Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: THE OPEN UNIVERSITY The Open University was created in 1968 to give people who cannot afford (6)_______ attend regular courses of study, the opportunity of studying and (7)_______ a university diploma or degree. They study at home and their academic performance is assessed by (8)_______ of written examinations or project work. Most Open University students (9)_______ in study while also holding down a job or coping with a busy home life. They study in order to update their job skills or for personal (10)_______ . At the heart of most courses is a (11)_______ of specially written and professionally printed textbooks and workbooks which students receive by post. On many of the courses, students are expected to watch television programmes on the BBC network, (12)_______ are usually broadcast in the (13)_______ hours of the morning. The (14)_______ of these programmes is to develop and broaden the study experience, (15)_______ students do not have to rely only on the printed material they are sent. Question 6. A. for B. to C. with D. in Question 7. A. to obtain B. obtain C. obtaining D. obtained Question 8. A. method B. means C. route D. system Question 9. A. join B. put C. fit D. take Question 10. A. satisfaction B. satisfied C. satisfying D. satisfactory Question 11. A. set B. heap C. club D. unit Question 12. A. which B. who C. that D. what Question 13. A. early B. starting C. first D. initial Question 14. A. cause B. aim C. reason D. end Question 15. A. although B. so that C. even though D. however Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 16. If you are at a loose end this weekend, I will show you round the city. Trang 1/6 - Mã đề thi 310 A. free B. confident C. reluctant. D. busy Question 17. The government has decided that the publication of the report would be "contrary to the public interest". A. despicable B. unpleasant C. agreeable D. urbane Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: Esperanto is what is called a planned, or artificial language. It was created more than a century ago by Polish eye doctor Ludwik Lazar Zamenhof. Zamenhof believed that a common language would help to alleviate some of the misunderstandings among cultures. In Zamenhofs first attempt at a universal language, he tried to create a language that was as uncomplicated as possible. This first language included words such as ab, ac, ba, eb, be, and ce. This did not result in a workable language in that these monosyllabic words. though short, were not easy to understand or to retain Next, Zamenhof tried a different way of constructing a simplified language. He made the words in his language sound like words that people already knew, but he simplified the grammar tremendously. One example of how he simplified the language can be seen in the suffixes: all nouns in this language end in 0, as in the noun amiko, which means "friend," and all adjectives end in -a, as in the adjective bela, which means "pretty." Another example of the simplified language can be seen in the prefix mal-, which makes a word opposite in meaning; the word malamiko therefore means "enemy," and the word malbela therefore means "ugly" in Zamenhofs language. In 1887, Zamenhof wrote a description of this language and published it. He used a pen name, Dr. Esperanto, when signing the book. He selected the name Esperanto because this word means "a person who hopes" in his language. Esperanto clubs began popping up throughout Europe and by1905, Esperanto had spread from Europe to America and Asia. In 1905, the First World Congress of Esperanto took place in France, with approximately 700 attendees from 20 different countries. Congresses were held annually for nine years, and 4,000 attendees were registered for the Tenth World Esperanto Congress scheduled for 1914, when World War I erupted and forced its cancellation. Esperanto has had its ups and downs in the period since World War I. Today, years after it was introduced, it is estimated that perhaps a quarter of a million people are fluent in it. This may seem like a large number, but it is really quite small when compared with the billion English speakers and billion Mandarin Chinese speakers in today's world. Current advocates would like to see its use grow considerably and are taking steps to try to make this happen. Question 18. The expression "popping up" in the fourth paragraph could best be replaced by ______. A. shouting B. leaping C. opening D. hiding Question 19. Which paragraph describes the predecessor to Esperanto? A. The third paragraph B. The first paragraph C. The second paragraph D. The last paragraph Question 20. According to the passage, what happened to the Tenth World Esperanto Congress? A. It had attendees from 20 countries B. It never took place. C. It was scheduled for 1915. D. It had 4,000 attendees. Question 21. It can be inferred from the passage that the Third World Congress of Esperanto took place in___ . A. 1905 B. 1913 C. 1907 D. 1909 Question 22. According to the passage, Zamenhof wanted to create a universal language ______. Trang 2/6 - Mã đề thi 310 A. to create one world culture B. to resolve cultural differences C. to provide a more complex language D. to build a name for himself Question 23. The expression "ups and downs" in the last paragraph is closed in meaning to____ A. highs and lows B. floors and ceilings C. take offs and landings D. tops and bottoms Question 24. The paragraph following the passage most likely discusses ______. A. the disadvantages of usi:1g an artificial language. B. how current supporters of Esperanto are encouraging its growth. C. attempts to reconvene the World Congress of Esperanto in the 1920s D. another of Zamenhofs accomplishment. Question 25. It can be inferred from the passage that the Esperanto word malespera means ______. A. hopelessness B. hopeful C. hopeless D. hope Question 26. The topic of this passage is ______. A. one man's efforts to create a universal language B. how language can be improved C. using language to communicate internationally D. a language developed in the last few years Question 27. This passage would most likely be assigned reading in a course on ______. A. applied linguistics B. world government C. English grammar D. European history Choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 28. We always feel ________ and secure in our family. A. safeguard B. safety C. safe D. safely Question 29. I must thank the man from ________ I got the present. A. that B. who C. which D. whom Question 30. My mother is the first________ up and the last________ to bed. A. getting- to go B. getting- going C. to get- going D. to get- to go Question 31. Mary asked me whether I _________ the football match on TV the day before. A. watch B. would watch C. have watched D. had watched Question 32. A: " How much sugar do you want in your coffee?" B: " ____" A. Little bit B. Not much C. So much D. Too much Question 33. A: Thanks very much for your help. B "_________." A. never mind B. You're welcome C. Yes, please D. that's right Question 34. The man said that he _________ the following day. A. will return B. returned C. had returned D. would return Question 35. It was _____ simple a question that everyone answered it correctly. A. too B. very C. such D. so Question 36. She accepted that she had acted _______ and mistakenly, which broke up her marriage. A. attractively B. romantically C. wisely D. unwisely Question 37. English, Maths and Science are _____ subjects in the national curriculum in England. A. supportive B. public C. core D. independent Question 38. "He didn't understand it." - "________." A. Was he? B. Neither did I C. So did I D. I did too Question 39. Fee-paying schools, often called "independent schools" or "___________ schools" Trang 3/6 - Mã đề thi 310 A. public B. primary C. state D. secondary Question 40. _____ in the diet is especially important for vegetarians. A. They obtain enough protein B. By obtaining enough protein C. Obtaining enough protein D. Enough protein is obtained Question 41. _________ includes our posture, facial expressions and gestures. A. Communication B. Verbal C. Body language D. Signal Question 42. When I _______ to the party, Tom and David _______, and John ________. A. was coming/ had danced/ singing B. came/ were dancing/ was singing C. have come/ are dancing/ is singing D. have come/ are dancing/ is singing Question 43. The advanced students are selected to take part ______ the annual International Olympic Competition. A. in B. for C. from D. at Question 44. The telephone _______ by Alexander Graham Bell. A. being invented B. inventing C. invented D. was invented Question 45. _______the manager's suggestions were reasonable, the supervisor agreed with them. A. Even though B. Although C. Because D. Until Question 46. Members of your family have very close relationship with each other, ________? A. do they B. don't they C. haven't they D. have they Read the following passage and choose the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions: EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE Education is another area of social life in which information technology is changing the way we communicate. Today's college students may not simply sit in a lecture or a library to learn about their field. Through their computers and the wonders of virtual reality they can participate in lifelike simulated experiences. Consider the following scenario of the future of education made possible through developments in information technology. For children over the age of 10, daily attendance at schools is not compulsory. Some of the older children attend school only once or twice weekly to get tutorial support or instruction from a teacher. For the most part, pupils are encouraged to work online from home. Students must complete a minimum number of study hours per year; however, they may make up these hours by studying at home at times that suit their family schedule. They can log on early or late in the day and even join live classes in other countries. In order to ensure that each student is learning adequately, computer software will automatically monitor the number of hours a week each student studies on-line as well as that students' learning materials and assessment activities. Reports will be available for parents and teachers. The software can then identify the best learning activities and condition for each individual student and generate similar activities. It can also identify areas of weak achievement and produce special programs adjusted to the students' needs. Question 47. The word encouraged in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. Permitted B. Allowed C. Suggested D. stimulated Question 48. The word suit in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. fit B. distub C. enhance D. show up Question 49. The pronoun "it" in paragraph 1 refers to ___________ A. learning activities B. The software C. Individual student D. condition Question 50. The word adequately in the passage mostly means __________ ? A. significantly B. consequently C. suficiently D. Suitably Trang 4/6 - Mã đề thi 310 Question 51. How many times are children who are older than 10 required to go to school weekly? A. three times B. once or twice C. notime D. four times Question 52. The pronoun "They" in paragraph 1 refers to ________ A. the wonders of virtual reality B. The computers C. The lectures D. college students Question 53. What CAN'T the software do? A. Design materials for the students B. Identify weaknesses of the students. C. Find out the best activities for the students. D. Monitor the time the students learn. Question 54. What is the topic of the passage? A. students don't have to go to school any more. B. Computer software will make sure students learn at home. C. The effect of information technology on education. D. Students can know about their weak aspects to focus. Question 55. What is NOT MENTIONED as a benefit of information technology to the students? A. Students' learning time won't be monitored. B. Students' weak achievement can be identified. C. Students can stay at home to learn. D. Students can learn at times that suit their schedule. Question 56. Who/What counts the number of hours per week that students spend learning? A. Parents B. Virtual reality C. Computer software D. Teacher Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 57. Where I am living now is convenient for work because I don't have travel far. A. have travel far B. Where I am C. for work because I don't D. is convenient Question 58. Mary found it hard to concentrate on her work because the noise. A. work B. it hard C. to concentrate D. because the noise Question 59. The reason why he's not feeling very well is simple - he's ate too much as usual. A. is simple B. as usual C. he's ate D. he's not feeling Question 60. She washes her hair at least six time a week A. time B. washes her hair C. a week D. at least six Question 61. I'll make some sandwiches before I'll leave for work. A. for work B. I'll make C. some sandwiches before D. I'll leave Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is CLOSET in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Question 62. When you are in a restaurant, you can raise your hand slightly to show that you need assistance. A. menu B. food C. bill D. help Question 63. Professor Smith was very interested in the diversity of cultures all over the world. A. difference B. changes C. conservation D. variety Question 64. I didn't think his comments were very appropriate at the time. A. correct B. right C. exact D. suitable Trang 5/6 - Mã đề thi 310 SECTION B: WRITING Part 1: Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. 1. I started learning English five years ago. I have ................................................................................................................................. 2. They said that Paula had quit five jobs before working for us. Paula……………………………………………………………………………………... 3. “Don’t forget to lock the door before you go out”, his mother said . His mother ……………………………………………………………………………… 4. If you don’t study hard, you will not be able to pass the final exam. Unless..………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. “ Let’s go to the cinema tonight” he said. He suggested……………………………………………………………………………… Part 2: In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the advantages of learning English well. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet. The following prompts might be helpful to you. - Communicating with people from other countries - Widening knowledge about other cultures - Getting good job in the future - ….. ____________________ HẾT ___________________ Thí sinh không được sử dụng tài liệu. Cán bộ coi thi không giải thích gì thêm. Họ và tên thí sinh: …………………………………….., Số báo danh: …………….. Trang 6/6 - Mã đề thi 310 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC 2 ĐÁP ÁN ĐỀ THI KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 NĂM HỌC 2015 - 2016 Môn: Tiếng Anh, Khối: 12 Đáp án gồm: 02 trang Đáp án mã đề: 140 01. A; 02. D; 03. A; 04. D; 05. B; 06. C; 07. B; 08. B; 09. B; 10. D; 11. D; 12. D; 13. B; 14. B; 15. A; 16. B; 17. B; 18. C; 19. D; 20. A; 21. A; 22. D; 23. A; 24. C; 25. A; 26. C; 27. A; 28. D; 29. A; 30. C; 31. C; 32. A; 33. A; 34. D; 35. B; 36. B; 37. A; 38. C; 39. D; 40. D; 41. C; 42. B; 43. C; 44. D; 45. B; 46. A; 47. C; 48. B; 49. D; 50. C; 51. B; 52. C; 53. C; 54. D; 55. A; 56. A; 57. C; 58. A; 59. D; 60. B; 61. C; 62. B; 63. D; 64. C; Đáp án mã đề: 174 01. B; 02. A; 03. D; 04. A; 05. A; 06. B; 07. B; 08. A; 09. D; 10. C; 11. B; 12. D; 13. C; 14. C; 15. C; 16. B; 17. D; 18. D; 19. D; 20. A; 21. D; 22. C; 23. B; 24. A; 25. B; 26. C; 27. A; 28. C; 29. D; 30. A; 31. D; 32. B; 33. A; 34. C; 35. A; 36. A; 37. D; 38. C; 39. C; 40. D; 41. D; 42. C; 43. B; 44. B; 45. A; 46. B; 47. B; 48. A; 49. A; 50. D; 51. B; 52. C; 53. B; 54. C; 55. B; 56. A; 57. C; 58. D; 59. C; 60. D; 61. C; 62. D; 63. B; 64. A; Đáp án mã đề: 208 01. D; 02. B; 03. C; 04. C; 05. A; 06. C; 07. D; 08. C; 09. A; 10. B; 11. A; 12. A; 13. B; 14. A; 15. D; 16. A; 17. B; 18. B; 19. C; 20. C; 21. A; 22. B; 23. B; 24. B; 25. A; 26. C; 27. D; 28. D; 29. A; 30. B; 31. C; 32. D; 33. A; 34. B; 35. C; 36. A; 37. C; 38. B; 39. D; 40. C; 41. B; 42. D; 43. B; 44. C; 45. C; 46. A; 47. A; 48. D; 49. B; 50. D; 51. C; 52. D; 53. A; 54. A; 55. C; 56. D; 57. C; 58. D; 59. D; 60. A; 61. B; 62. D; 63. D; 64. B; Đáp án mã đề: 242 01. B; 02. B; 03. C; 04. A; 05. D; 06. C; 07. C; 08. D; 09. D; 10. D; 11. B; 12. C; 13. A; 14. B; 15. D; 16. A; 17. A; 18. B; 19. A; 20. D; 21. A; 22. C; 23. A; 24. C; 25. B; 26. C; 27. B; 28. B; 29. B; 30. B; 31. A; 32. C; 33. C; 34. B; 35. D; 36. A; 37. D; 38. B; 39. B; 40. A; 41. C; 42. D; 43. C; 44. D; 45. B; 46. A; 47. D; 48. A; 49. A; 50. D; 51. D; 52. C; 53. D; 54. C; 55. D; 56. C; 57. C; 58. A; 59. A; 60. D; 61. A; 62. C; 63. B; 64. B; 1/2 Đáp án mã đề: 276 01. A; 02. B; 03. C; 04. B; 05. D; 06. A; 07. C; 08. D; 09. D; 10. A; 11. A; 12. A; 13. B; 14. D; 15. B; 16. A; 17. B; 18. A; 19. C; 20. A; 21. D; 22. C; 23. B; 24. C; 25. D; 26. A; 27. A; 28. D; 29. D; 30. B; 31. D; 32. A; 33. C; 34. A; 35. C; 36. C; 37. C; 38. B; 39. B; 40. D; 41. B; 42. A; 43. A; 44. A; 45. C; 46. B; 47. D; 48. C; 49. C; 50. B; 51. C; 52. B; 53. D; 54. D; 55. C; 56. C; 57. D; 58. B; 59. A; 60. B; 61. D; 62. C; 63. B; 64. D; Đáp án mã đề: 310 01. D; 02. B; 03. C; 04. B; 05. A; 06. B; 07. C; 08. B; 09. A; 10. A; 11. A; 12. A; 13. A; 14. B; 15. B; 16. D; 17. C; 18. C; 19. C; 20. B; 21. C; 22. B; 23. A; 24. B; 25. C; 26. A; 27. A; 28. C; 29. D; 30. D; 31. D; 32. B; 33. B; 34. D; 35. D; 36. D; 37. C; 38. B; 39. A; 40. C; 41. C; 42. B; 43. A; 44. D; 45. C; 46. B; 47. D; 48. A; 49. B; 50. C; 51. B; 52. D; 53. A; 54. C; 55. A; 56. C; 57. A; 58. D; 59. C; 60. A; 61. D; 62. D; 63. D; 64. D; SECTION 2. 1. I have learnt English for five years. 2. Paula was said to have quit five jobs before working for us. 3. His mother reminded him to lock the door before he went out. 4. Unless you study hard, you will not be able to pass the final exam. 5. He suggested going to the cinema that night. ___________________HẾT___________________ 2/2 SỞ GD & ĐT VĨNH PHÚC ĐỀ KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 LỚP 12 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC NĂM HỌC 2015-2016 Đề thi có 05 trang ĐỀ THI MÔN: TIẾNG ANH Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút, không kể thời gian giao đề Mã đề thi 130 Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of the primary stress in each of the following questions. Câu 1: A. allegedly B. accountancy C. bewildered D. concentrate Câu 2: A. certificate B. compulsory C. undergraduate D. curriculum Câu 3: A. compliment B. counterpart C. determine D. marvelous Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Câu 4: A. comparison B. division C. conclusion D. vision Câu 5: A. solution B. pull C. look D. could Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Câu 6: In 1959 the political philosopher Hannah Arendt became the first woman_______a full professor at Princeton University. A. to appoint B. was appointed C. to be appointed D. who be appointed as Câu 7: Your car is too dirty! When did you have it___________? A. to be washed B. washed C. wash D. to wash Câu 8: In Britain, most pupils transfer from primary to________school at the age of 11. A. middle B. secondary C. upper D. elementary Câu 9: They______the job by this time tomorrow. A. will finish B. will be finishing C. will have finished D. are finishing Câu 10: Safety should take _________over all other matters in the workplace. A. precede B. precedent C. preceding D. precedence Câu 11: She said she met you once at the Parade last week. _________ since? A. Have you met her B. Had you met her C. Did you meet her D. Were you met her Câu 12: I am sorry I cannot hear what you________because everybody ______so loudly. A. were saying/ has talked B. said/ was talking C. have just said/ is talking D. are saying/ talk Câu 13: Some sociologists believe that the_________family of parents and children is rapidly becoming a thing of the past. A. closed B. joint C. nuclear D. extended Câu 14: __________with your friends and give me your answer tomorrow. A. Talk over it B. Talk it over C. Work it out D. Look into it Câu 15: We arranged to meet at the station, but she didn’t___________. A. get through B. wait on C. turn up D. walk out Câu 16: Paul is asking Joe for permission to play the guitar in the room. Choose the most suitable response to fill in the blank in the following exchange. Paul: “Is it all right if I play the guitar in here while you’re studying?” Joe: “_____________________” A. Well, actually, I’d prefer it if you didn’t B. Well, if only you didn’t. C. Oh, I wish you wouldn’t. D. Well, I’d rather not. Câu 17: The visitors were complaining______in the rain. A. for waiting B. me about waiting C. about having to wait D. that they have to wait Câu 18: Any child has the right to an education________of sex, creed, race or nationality. A. despite B. because C. regardless D. providing Câu 19: Joanne is criticizing Alex for taking a late flight. Choose the most suitable response to fill in the blank in the following exchange. Joanne: “You should have flown with the earlier flight!” Alex: “___________________” A. Oh, I’m sorry to hear that. B. It was fully booked. C. Why not? D. Yes, I should Câu 20: Family_________later took on a much greater significance in his life. A. relatives B. relationships C. relation D. relations Câu 21: Mike asked Sarah how long______English so far. A. she had been learning B. she learned C. she has been learning D. had she learned Câu 22: ______her tears, she waved goodbye to her family from the station platform. A. Filling out B. Bringing in C. Turn in over D. Fighting back Câu 23: Mark first________ his wife three years ago when they_________at university. A. met/ have studied B. met/ were studying C. has met/ studied D. met/ had been studying Câu 24: _________, these students are among the best prepared who have been through this university. A. On the whole B. At the whole C. In the general D. In generally Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 25: The new laws to conserve wildlife in the area will come into force next month. A. protect B. pollute C. eliminate D. destroy Câu 26: My uncle, who is an accomplished guitarist, taught me how to play. A. ill-educated B. unskilled C. unqualified D. unimpaired Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) SIMILAR in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 27: Every woman who had enough criteria can join the beauty contest irrespective of their background. A. on account of B. in consideration of C. under guarantee D. regardless of Câu 28: Although we argued with him for a long time, he stood his ground. A. changed his decision B. felt sorry for us C. wanted to continue D. refused to change his decision Câu 29: I am concerned about my children. A. angry B. sad C. happy D. worried Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. Ever since humans have inhabited the earth, they have made use of various forms of communication. Generally, this expression of thoughts and feelings has been in the form of oral speech. When there is a language barrier, communication is accomplished through sign language in which motions stand for letters, words, and ideas. Tourists, the deaf, and the mute have had to resort to this form of expression. Many of these symbols of whole words are very picturesque and exact and can be used internationally, spelling, however, cannot. Body language transmits ideas or thoughts by certain actions, either intentionally or unintentionally. A wink can be a way of flirting or indicating that the party is only joking. A nod signifies approval, while shaking the head indicates a negative reaction. Other forms of non-linguistic language can be found in Braille (a system of raised dots read with the fingertips), signal flags, Morse code, and smoke signals. Road maps and picture signs also guide, warn, and instruct people. While verbalization is the most common form of language, other systems and techniques also express human thoughts and feelings. Câu 30: The word "wink" in the second paragraph means most nearly the same as______________ A. close one eye briefly B. close two eyes briefly C. bob the head up and down D. shake the head from side to side Câu 31: The word "these" in the first paragraph refers to__________ A. sign language motions B. tourists C. the deaf and the mute D. thoughts and feelings Câu 32: Which of the following best summarizes this passage? A. Although other forms of communication exist, verbalization is the fastest. B. When language is a barrier, people will find other forms of communication. C. Non-linguistic language is invaluable to foreigners. D. Everybody uses only one form of communication. Câu 33: Which form other than oral speech would be the most commonly be the most commonly used among blind people? A. Signal flags B. Picture signs C. Body language D. Braille Câu 34: How many different forms of communication are mentioned here? A. 5 B. 7 C. 9 D. 11 Câu 35: Sign language is said to be very picturesque and exact and can be used internationally EXCEPT for_____________ A. spelling B. ideas C. whole words D. expressions Câu 36: People need to communicate in order to_____________. A. create language barriers B. keep from reading with their fingertips C. be picturesque and exact D. express thoughts and feelings Câu 37: What would be MOST likely to use Morse code? A. A scientist B. A spy C. An airline pilot D. A telegrapher Câu 38: All of the following statements are true EXCEPT______________ A. There are many forms of communication in existence today. B. Verbalization is the most common form of communication. C. Ideas and thoughts can be transmitted by body language. D. The deaf and mute can use an oral form of communication. Câu 39: What is the best title for the passage? A. The Many Forms of Communication B. Picturesque Symbols of Communication C. Ways of Expressing Feelings D. The Importance of Sign Language Mark the letter A, B C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Câu 40: The human brain is often comparing to a computer, but such an analogy can be misleading. A. The human B. misleading C. comparing D. but such Câu 41: The woman accused to shoplift was found not guilty and was acquitted A. accused B. to shoplift C. not guilty D. was acquitted Câu 42: While the teacher was explaining the some on the blackboard, the children threw paper aeroplanes around the classroom. A. on the B. threw C. around D. was explaining Câu 43: Most college-age students today are interested in finding universities in which can pursue both academic and athletic extracurricular activities. A. Most B. interested in C. which can D. both Câu 44: You can apply for a better job when you will have had more experience. A. will have had B. when C. apply for D. more experience Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks. Speech is one of the most important (45) ______ communicating. It consists of far more than just making noises. To talk and also to (46)______ by other people, we have to speak a language, that is, we have to use combinations of (47)______ that everyone agrees to stand for a particular object or idea. Communication would be impossible if everyone made up their own language. Learning a language properly is very (48)______ . The basic (49)______ of English is not very large, and not only about 2,000 words are needed to speak it quite(50)______. But the more idea you can (51)______ the more precise you can be about their exact meaning. Words are the (52)______ thing we use in communicating what we want to say. The way we (53)______ the words is also very important. Our tone of voice can express many emotions and (54)______ whether we are pleased or angry, for instance. Câu 45: A. rules B. reason C. ways D. tests Câu 46: A. be talked B. be examined C. be understood D. be spoken Câu 47: A. sounds B. languages C. systems D. talks Câu 48: A. important B. expensive C. simple D. easy Câu 49: A. vocabulary B. word C. structure D. grammar Câu 50: A. perfect B. well C. good D. fluent Câu 51: A. grow B. need C. pass D. express Câu 52: A. most B. main C. certain D. full Câu 53: A. send B. talk C. say D. pass Câu 54: A. know B. show C. ask D. understand Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. This rapid transcontinental settlement and these new urban industrial circumstances of the last half of the 19th century were accompanied by the development of a national literature of great abundance and variety. New themes, new forms, new subjects, new regions, new authors, new audiences all emerged in the literature of this half century. As a result, at the onset of World War I, the spirit and substance of American literature had evolved remarkably, just as its center of production had shifted from Boston to New York in the late 1880s and the sources of its energy to Chicago and the Midwest. No longer was it produced, at least in its popular forms, in the main by solemn, typically moralistic men from New England and the Old South; no longer were polite, well-dressed, grammatically correct, middle-class young people the only central characters in its narratives; no longer were these narratives to be set in exotic places and remote times; no longer, indeed, were fiction, poetry, drama, and formal history the chief acceptable forms of literary expression; no longer, finally, was literature read primarily by young, middle class women. In sum, American literature in these years fulfilled in considerable measure the condition Walt Whitman called for in 1867 in describing Leaves of Grass: it treats, he said of his own major work, each state and region as peers "and expands from them, and includes the world ... connecting an American citizen with the citizens of all nations." At the same time, these years saw the emergence of what has been designated "the literature of argument," powerful works in sociology, philosophy, psychology, many of them impelled by the spirit of exposure and reform. Just as America learned to play a role in this half century as an autonomous international political, economic, and military power, so did its literature establish itself as a producer of major works. Câu 55: It can be inferred from the first paragraph that the previous passage probably discussed_____ A. the limitations of American literature to this time B. the fashions and values of 19th century America C. he importance of tradition to writers D. new developments in industrialization and population shifts Câu 56: The word “evolved” in paragraph two is closest in meaning to______________ A. diminished B. changed C. became famous D. turned back Câu 57: The word “exotic" in paragraph two is closest in meaning to_________ A. old-fashioned B. unusual C. urban D. well-known Câu 58: The phrase “these years” in the third paragraph refers to ___________. A. the present B. the 1900s C. the early 1800s D. 1850-1900 Câu 59: All of the following can be inferred from the passage about the ne J literature EXCEPT____________ A. It was not highly regarded internationally B. It broke with many literary traditions of the past C. It introduced new American themes, characters, and settings D. It spoke to the issue of reform and change Câu 60: The author uses the word “indeed” in the second paragraph for what purpose? A. To wind down his argument. B. For variety in a lengthy paragraph. C. To show a favorable attitude to these forms of literature. D. To emphasize the contrast he is making. Câu 61: It can be inferred from the passage that Walt Whitman_____________ A. was disapproving of the new literature B. disliked urban life C. was an international diplomat D. wrote Leaves of Grass Câu 62: This passage would probably be read in which of the following academic courses? A. Current events B. International affairs C. American literature D. European history Câu 63: The main idea of this passage is____________ A. that the new American literature was less provincial than the old B. that most people were wary of the new literature C. that World War I caused a dramatic change in America D. that centers of culture shifted from East to West Câu 64: The word “it” in the second paragraph refers to______________ A. the manufacturing B. American literature C. the population D. the energy WRITING Part I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Question 65: “I should say nothing about it if I were you” my brother said. My brother advised …………………………………………………………….. Question 66: The architect has drawn plans for an extension to the house. Plans ………………………………………………………………. Question 67: Everybody has agreed that changes to the scheme are necessary. Changes ……………………………………………………………….. Question 68: They are going to rebuild our kitchen next week. We ………………………………………………………………….. Question 69: The Presidential visit attracted such an enormous crowd that all traffic came to a standstill. So many people turned …………………………………………………………. Part II. In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the person in your family who you admire most. The following prompts may be helpful to you: + Who is the person you admire most in your family? + What does he/she look like? + What are his/her personalities? + Why do you admire him/her most? ----------------------------------------------- ----------- HẾT ---------- SỞ GD & ĐT VĨNH PHÚC ĐỀ KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 LỚP 12 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC NĂM HỌC 2015-2016 Đề thi có 05 trang ĐỀ THI MÔN: TIẾNG ANH Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút, không kể thời gian giao đề Mã đề thi 207 Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. This rapid transcontinental settlement and these new urban industrial circumstances of the last half of the 19th century were accompanied by the development of a national literature of great abundance and variety. New themes, new forms, new subjects, new regions, new authors, new audiences all emerged in the literature of this half century. As a result, at the onset of World War I, the spirit and substance of American literature had evolved remarkably, just as its center of production had shifted from Boston to New York in the late 1880s and the sources of its energy to Chicago and the Midwest. No longer was it produced, at least in its popular forms, in the main by solemn, typically moralistic men from New England and the Old South; no longer were polite, well-dressed, grammatically correct, middle-class young people the only central characters in its narratives; no longer were these narratives to be set in exotic places and remote times; no longer, indeed, were fiction, poetry, drama, and formal history the chief acceptable forms of literary expression; no longer, finally, was literature read primarily by young, middle class women. In sum, American literature in these years fulfilled in considerable measure the condition Walt Whitman called for in 1867 in describing Leaves of Grass: it treats, he said of his own major work, each state and region as peers "and expands from them, and includes the world ... connecting an American citizen with the citizens of all nations." At the same time, these years saw the emergence of what has been designated "the literature of argument," powerful works in sociology, philosophy, psychology, many of them impelled by the spirit of exposure and reform. Just as America learned to play a role in this half century as an autonomous international political, economic, and military power, so did its literature establish itself as a producer of major works. Câu 1: The word “evolved” in paragraph two is closest in meaning to______________ A. changed B. turned back C. diminished D. became famous Câu 2: All of the following can be inferred from the passage about the ne J literature EXCEPT____________ A. It was not highly regarded internationally B. It broke with many literary traditions of the past C. It spoke to the issue of reform and change D. It introduced new American themes, characters, and settings Câu 3: The phrase “these years” in the third paragraph refers to ___________. A. the early 1800s B. 1850-1900 C. the 1900s D. the present Câu 4: The word “it” in the second paragraph refers to______________ A. the population B. American literature C. the energy D. the manufacturing Câu 5: It can be inferred from the first paragraph that the previous passagfl probably discussed_____________ A. new developments in industrialization and population shifts B. he importance of tradition to writers C. the limitations of American literature to this time D. the fashions and values of 19th century America Câu 6: This passage would probably be read in which of the following academic courses? A. Current events B. International affairs C. American literature D. European history Câu 7: The word “exotic" in paragraph two is closest in meaning to_________ A. unusual B. old-fashioned C. well-known D. urban Câu 8: The main idea of this passage is____________ A. that the new American literature was less provincial than the old B. that most people were wary of the new literature C. that World War I caused a dramatic change in America D. that centers of culture shifted from East to West Câu 9: The author uses the word “indeed” in the second paragraph for what purpose? A. To show a favorable attitude to these forms of literature. B. To emphasize the contrast he is making. C. For variety in a lengthy paragraph. D. To wind down his argument. Câu 10: It can be inferred from the passage that Walt Whitman_____________ A. was disapproving of the new literature B. disliked urban life C. was an international diplomat D. wrote Leaves of Grass Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Câu 11: A. vision B. conclusion C. division D. comparison Câu 12: A. solution B. could C. pull D. look Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks. Speech is one of the most important (13) ______ communicating. It consists of far more than just making noises. To talk and also to (14) ______ by other people, we have to speak a language, that is, we have to use combinations of (15) ______ that everyone agrees to stand for a particular object or idea. Communication would be impossible if everyone made up their own language. Learning a language properly is very (16)______ . The basic (17) ______ of English is not very large, and not only about 2,000 words are needed to speak it quite (18)______. But the more idea you can (19) ______ the more precise you can be about their exact meaning. Words are the (20) ______ thing we use in communicating what we want to say. The way we (21)______ the words is also very important. Our tone of voice can express many emotions and (22) ______ whether we are pleased or angry, for instance. Câu 13: A. rules B. reason C. ways D. tests Câu 14: A. be understood B. be spoken C. be examined D. be talked Câu 15: A. sounds B. languages C. systems D. talks Câu 16: A. easy B. expensive C. simple D. important Câu 17: A. grammar B. structure C. vocabulary D. word Câu 18: A. perfect B. good C. well D. fluent Câu 19: A. need B. grow C. express D. pass Câu 20: A. most B. main C. certain D. full Câu 21: A. talk B. send C. pass D. say Câu 22: A. know B. show C. ask D. understand Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Câu 23: The visitors were complaining______in the rain. A. for waiting B. me about waiting C. about having to wait D. that they have to wait Câu 24: Family_________later took on a much greater significance in his life. A. relatives B. relationships C. relation D. relations Câu 25: Joanne is criticizing Alex for taking a late flight. Choose the most suitable response to fill in the blank in the following exchange. Joanne: “You should have flown with the earlier flight!” Alex: “___________________” A. Oh, I’m sorry to hear that. B. It was fully booked. C. Yes, I should D. Why not? Câu 26: Safety should take _________over all other matters in the workplace. A. precede B. precedent C. preceding D. precedence Câu 27: We arranged to meet at the station, but she didn’t___________. A. get through B. turn up C. walk out D. wait on Câu 28: Some sociologists believe that the_________family of parents and children is rapidly becoming a thing of the past. A. extended B. joint C. nuclear D. closed Câu 29: __________with your friends and give me your answer tomorrow. A. Talk over it B. Talk it over C. Work it out D. Look into it Câu 30: In 1959 the political philosopher Hannah Arendt became the first woman_______a full professor at Princeton University. A. to appoint B. was appointed C. to be appointed D. who be appointed as Câu 31: They______the job by this time tomorrow. A. will be finishing B. will finish C. are finishing D. will have finished Câu 32: Mark first________ his wife three years ago when they_________at university. A. met/ have studied B. met/ were studying C. has met/ studied D. met/ had been studying Câu 33: Mike asked Sarah how long______English so far. A. she had been learning B. she learned C. she has been learning D. had she learned Câu 34: In Britain, most pupils transfer from primary to________school at the age of 11. A. secondary B. elementary C. upper D. middle Câu 35: Any child has the right to an education________of sex, creed, race or nationality. A. regardless B. providing C. despite D. because Câu 36: _________, these students are among the best prepared who have been through this university. A. On the whole B. At the whole C. In the general D. In generally Câu 37: Your car is too dirty! When did you have it___________? A. to be washed B. wash C. washed D. to wash Câu 38: ______her tears, she waved goodbye to her family from the station platform. A. Filling out B. Bringing in C. Turn in over D. Fighting back Câu 39: Paul is asking Joe for permission to play the guitar in the room. Choose the most suitable response to fill in the blank in the following exchange. Paul: “Is it all right if I play the guitar in here while you’re studying?” Joe: “_____________________” A. Well, if only you didn’t. B. Oh, I wish you wouldn’t. C. Well, actually, I’d prefer it if you didn’t D. Well, I’d rather not. Câu 40: She said she met you once at the Parade last week. _________since? A. Have you met her B. Were you met her C. Had you met her D. Did you meet her Câu 41: I am sorry I cannot hear what you________because everybody ______so loudly. A. were saying/ has talked B. said/ was talking C. have just said/ is talking D. are saying/ talk Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 42: The new laws to conserve wildlife in the area will come into force next month. A. eliminate B. protect C. pollute D. destroy Câu 43: My uncle, who is an accomplished guitarist, taught me how to play. A. unqualified B. ill-educated C. unskilled D. unimpaired Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) SIMILAR in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 44: Every woman who had enough criteria can join the beauty contest irrespective of their background. A. under guarantee B. in consideration of C. regardless of D. on account of Câu 45: Although we argued with him for a long time, he stood his ground. A. wanted to continue B. felt sorry for us C. refused to change his decision D. changed his decision Câu 46: I am concerned about my children. A. angry B. sad C. happy D. worried Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. Ever since humans have inhabited the earth, they have made use of various forms of communication. Generally, this expression of thoughts and feelings has been in the form of oral speech. When there is a language barrier, communication is accomplished through sign language in which motions stand for letters, words, and ideas. Tourists, the deaf, and the mute have had to resort to this form of expression. Many of these symbols of whole words are very picturesque and exact and can be used internationally, spelling, however, cannot. Body language transmits ideas or thoughts by certain actions, either intentionally or unintentionally. A wink can be a way of flirting or indicating that the party is only joking. A nod signifies approval, while shaking the head indicates a negative reaction. Other forms of non-linguistic language can be found in Braille (a system of raised dots read with the fingertips), signal flags, Morse code, and smoke signals. Road maps and picture signs also guide, warn, and instruct people. While verbalization is the most common form of language, other systems and techniques also express human thoughts and feelings. Câu 47: Which form other than oral speech would be the most commonly be the most commonly used among blind people? A. Signal flags B. Picture signs C. Body language D. Braille Câu 48: Which of the following best summarizes this passage? A. Although other forms of communication exist, verbalization is the fastest. B. When language is a barrier, people will find other forms of communication. C. Non-linguistic language is invaluable to foreigners. D. Everybody uses only one form of communication. Câu 49: Sign language is said to be very picturesque and exact and can be used internationally EXCEPT for_____________ A. spelling B. whole words C. ideas D. expressions Câu 50: What would be MOST likely to use Morse code? A. A scientist B. A spy C. An airline pilot D. A telegrapher Câu 51: The word "wink" in the second paragraph means most nearly the same as______________ A. bob the head up and down B. close one eye briefly C. shake the head from side to side D. close two eyes briefly Câu 52: How many different forms of communication are mentioned here? A. 7 B. 5 C. 11 D. 9 Câu 53: People need to communicate in order to_____________. A. keep from reading with their fingertips B. be picturesque and exact C. create language barriers D. express thoughts and feelings Câu 54: The word "these" in the first paragraph refers to___________ A. thoughts and feelings B. tourists C. sign language motions D. the deaf and the mute Câu 55: All of the following statements are true EXCEPT______________ A. There are many forms of communication in existence today. B. Verbalization is the most common form of communication. C. Ideas and thoughts can be transmitted by body language. D. The deaf and mute can use an oral form of communication. Câu 56: What is the best title for the passage? A. The Many Forms of Communication B. Picturesque Symbols of Communication C. Ways of Expressing Feelings D. The Importance of Sign Language Mark the letter A, B C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Câu 57: The woman accused to shoplift was found not guilty and was acquitted A. accused B. to shoplift C. not guilty D. was acquitted Câu 58: Most college-age students today are interested in finding universities in which can pursue both academic and athletic extracurricular activities. A. which can B. Most C. both D. interested in Câu 59: While the teacher was explaining the some on the blackboard, the children threw paper aeroplanes around the classroom. A. around B. threw C. on the D. was explaining Câu 60: The human brain is often comparing to a computer, but such an analogy can be misleading. A. misleading B. The human C. but such D. comparing Câu 61: You can apply for a better job when you will have had more experience. A. when B. will have had C. apply for D. more experience Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of the primary stress in each of the following questions. Câu 62: A. certificate B. compulsory C. undergraduate D. curriculum Câu 63: A. accountancy B. concentrate C. allegedly D. bewildered Câu 64: A. marvelous B. counterpart C. compliment D. determine WRITING Part I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Question 65: “I should say nothing about it if I were you” my brother said. My brother advised …………………………………………………………….. Question 66: The architect has drawn plans for an extension to the house. Plans ………………………………………………………………. Question 67: Everybody has agreed that changes to the scheme are necessary. Changes ……………………………………………………………….. Question 68: They are going to rebuild our kitchen next week. We ………………………………………………………………….. Question 69: The Presidential visit attracted such an enormous crowd that all traffic came to a standstill. So many people turned …………………………………………………………. Part II. In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the person in your family who you admire most. The following prompts may be helpful to you: + Who is the person you admire most in your family? + What does he/she look like? + What are his/her personalities? + Why do you admire him/her most? ----------------------------------------------- ----------- HẾT -------- SỞ GD & ĐT VĨNH PHÚC ĐỀ KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 LỚP 12 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC NĂM HỌC 2015-2016 Đề thi có 05 trang ĐỀ THI MÔN: TIẾNG ANH Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút, không kể thời gian giao đề Mã đề thi 361 Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. Ever since humans have inhabited the earth, they have made use of various forms of communication. Generally, this expression of thoughts and feelings has been in the form of oral speech. When there is a language barrier, communication is accomplished through sign language in which motions stand for letters, words, and ideas. Tourists, the deaf, and the mute have had to resort to this form of expression. Many of these symbols of whole words are very picturesque and exact and can be used internationally, spelling, however, cannot. Body language transmits ideas or thoughts by certain actions, either intentionally or unintentionally. A wink can be a way of flirting or indicating that the party is only joking. A nod signifies approval, while shaking the head indicates a negative reaction. Other forms of non-linguistic language can be found in Braille (a system of raised dots read with the fingertips), signal flags, Morse code, and smoke signals. Road maps and picture signs also guide, warn, and instruct people. While verbalization is the most common form of language, other systems and techniques also express human thoughts and feelings. Câu 1: The word "wink" in the second paragraph means most nearly the same as______________ A. bob the head up and down B. close one eye briefly C. shake the head from side to side D. close two eyes briefly Câu 2: Sign language is said to be very picturesque and exact and can be used internationally EXCEPT for_____________ A. whole words B. ideas C. spelling D. expressions Câu 3: Which form other than oral speech would be the most commonly be the most commonly used among blind people? A. Signal flags B. Picture signs C. Body language D. Braille Câu 4: Which of the following best summarizes this passage? A. Although other forms of communication exist, verbalization is the fastest. B. Non-linguistic language is invaluable to foreigners. C. Everybody uses only one form of communication. D. When language is a barrier, people will find other forms of communication. Câu 5: People need to communicate in order to_____________. A. keep from reading with their fingertips B. be picturesque and exact C. create language barriers D. express thoughts and feelings Câu 6: All of the following statements are true EXCEPT______________ A. There are many forms of communication in existence today. B. The deaf and mute can use an oral form of communication. C. Ideas and thoughts can be transmitted by body language. D. Verbalization is the most common form of communication. Câu 7: The word "these" in the first paragraph refers to___________ A. thoughts and feelings B. tourists C. sign language motions D. the deaf and the mute Câu 8: What is the best title for the passage? A. The Many Forms of Communication B. Picturesque Symbols of Communication C. Ways of Expressing Feelings D. The Importance of Sign Language Câu 9: What would be MOST likely to use Morse code? A. A scientist B. A telegrapher C. A spy D. An airline pilot Câu 10: How many different forms of communication are mentioned here? A. 7 B. 5 C. 11 D. 9 Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of the primary stress in each of the following questions. Câu 11: A. bewildered B. allegedly C. accountancy D. concentrate Câu 12: A. certificate B. undergraduate C. curriculum D. compulsory Câu 13: A. determine B. marvelous C. compliment D. counterpart Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Câu 14: A. solution B. could C. pull D. look Câu 15: A. division B. comparison C. conclusion D. vision Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 16: The new laws to conserve wildlife in the area will come into force next month. A. destroy B. protect C. eliminate D. pollute Câu 17: My uncle, who is an accomplished guitarist, taught me how to play. A. unimpaired B. unskilled C. unqualified D. ill-educated Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) SIMILAR in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 18: I am concerned about my children. A. angry B. sad C. happy D. worried Câu 19: Every woman who had enough criteria can join the beauty contest irrespective of their background. A. on account of B. in consideration of C. under guarantee D. regardless of Câu 20: Although we argued with him for a long time, he stood his ground. A. wanted to continue B. refused to change his decision C. felt sorry for us D. changed his decision Mark the letter A, B C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Câu 21: Most college-age students today are interested in finding universities in which can pursue both academic and athletic extracurricular activities. A. which can B. Most C. both D. interested in Câu 22: You can apply for a better job when you will have had more experience. A. will have had B. apply for C. more experience D. when Câu 23: The woman accused to shoplift was found not guilty and was acquitted A. accused B. not guilty C. was acquitted D. to shoplift Câu 24: The human brain is often comparing to a computer, but such an analogy can be misleading. A. misleading B. The human C. but such D. comparing Câu 25: While the teacher was explaining the some on the blackboard, the children threw paper aeroplanes around the classroom. A. threw B. around C. was explaining D. on the Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks. Speech is one of the most important (26) ______ communicating. It consists of far more than just making noises. To talk and also to (27) ______ by other people, we have to speak a language, that is, we have to use combinations of (28)______ that everyone agrees to stand for a particular object or idea. Communication would be impossible if everyone made up their own language. Learning a language properly is very (29) ______. The basic (30) ______ of English is not very large, and not only about 2,000 words are needed to speak it quite (31) ______. But the more idea you can (32) ______ the more precise you can be about their exact meaning. Words are the (33) ______ thing we use in communicating what we want to say. The way we (34)______ the words is also very important. Our tone of voice can express many emotions and (35) ______ whether we are pleased or angry, for instance. Câu 26: A. reason B. tests C. ways D. rules Câu 27: A. be understood B. be spoken C. be examined D. be talked Câu 28: A. talks B. sounds C. languages D. systems Câu 29: A. easy B. simple C. important D. expensive Câu 30: A. structure B. vocabulary C. grammar D. word Câu 31: A. perfect B. good C. well D. fluent Câu 32: A. need B. grow C. express D. pass Câu 33: A. certain B. main C. full D. most Câu 34: A. talk B. send C. pass D. say Câu 35: A. ask B. know C. understand D. show Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Câu 36: Some sociologists believe that the_________family of parents and children is rapidly becoming a thing of the past. A. extended B. joint C. nuclear D. closed Câu 37: They______the job by this time tomorrow. A. are finishing B. will have finished C. will finish D. will be finishing Câu 38: Safety should take _________over all other matters in the workplace. A. precede B. precedent C. preceding D. precedence Câu 39: __________with your friends and give me your answer tomorrow. A. Talk it over B. Work it out C. Talk over it D. Look into it Câu 40: The visitors were complaining______in the rain. A. me about waiting B. for waiting C. about having to wait D. that they have to wait Câu 41: Family_________later took on a much greater significance in his life. A. relations B. relation C. relationships D. relatives Câu 42: ______her tears, she waved goodbye to her family from the station platform. A. Filling out B. Turn in over C. Bringing in D. Fighting back Câu 43: In Britain, most pupils transfer from primary to________school at the age of 11. A. secondary B. elementary C. upper D. middle Câu 44: Mark first________ his wife three years ago when they_________at university. A. met/ have studied B. met/ were studying C. has met/ studied D. met/ had been studying Câu 45: She said she met you once at the Parade last week. _________since? A. Did you meet her B. Had you met her C. Have you met her D. Were you met her Câu 46: I am sorry I cannot hear what you________because everybody ______so loudly. A. were saying/ has talked B. said/ was talking C. have just said/ is talking D. are saying/ talk Câu 47: Any child has the right to an education________of sex, creed, race, or nationality. A. regardless B. providing C. despite D. because Câu 48: _________, these students are among the best prepared who have been through this university. A. On the whole B. At the whole C. In the general D. In generally Câu 49: In 1959 the political philosopher Hannah Arendt became the first woman_______a full professor at Princeton University. A. to appoint B. to be appointed C. who be appointed as D. was appointed Câu 50: We arranged to meet at the station, but she didn’t___________. A. turn up B. wait on C. walk out D. get through Câu 51: Paul is asking Joe for permission to play the guitar in the room. Choose the most suitable response to fill in the blank in the following exchange. Paul: “Is it all right if I play the guitar in here while you’re studying?” Joe: “_____________________” A. Oh, I wish you wouldn’t. B. Well, actually, I’d prefer it if you didn’t C. Well, if only you didn’t. D. Well, I’d rather not. Câu 52: Your car is too dirty! When did you have it___________? A. to wash B. washed C. to be washed D. wash Câu 53: Joanne is criticizing Alex for taking a late flight. Choose the most suitable response to fill in the blank in the following exchange. Joanne: “You should have flown with the earlier flight!” Alex: “___________________” A. It was fully booked. B. Oh, I’m sorry to hear that. C. Why not? D. Yes, I should Câu 54: Mike asked Sarah how long______English so far. A. she has been learning B. had she learned C. she learned D. she had been learning Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. This rapid transcontinental settlement and these new urban industrial circumstances of the last half of the 19th century were accompanied by the development of a national literature of great abundance and variety. New themes, new forms, new subjects, new regions, new authors, new audiences all emerged in the literature of this half century. As a result, at the onset of World War I, the spirit and substance of American literature had evolved remarkably, just as its center of production had shifted from Boston to New York in the late 1880s and the sources of its energy to Chicago and the Midwest. No longer was it produced, at least in its popular forms, in the main by solemn, typically moralistic men from New England and the Old South; no longer were polite, well-dressed, grammatically correct, middle-class young people the only central characters in its narratives; no longer were these narratives to be set in exotic places and remote times; no longer, indeed, were fiction, poetry, drama, and formal history the chief acceptable forms of literary expression; no longer, finally, was literature read primarily by young, middle class women. In sum, American literature in these years fulfilled in considerable measure the condition Walt Whitman called for in 1867 in describing Leaves of Grass: it treats, he said of his own major work, each state and region as peers "and expands from them, and includes the world ... connecting an American citizen with the citizens of all nations." At the same time, these years saw the emergence of what has been designated "the literature of argument," powerful works in sociology, philosophy, psychology, many of them impelled by the spirit of exposure and reform. Just as America learned to play a role in this half century as an autonomous international political, economic, and military power, so did its literature establish itself as a producer of major works. Câu 55: The main idea of this passage is____________ A. that the new American literature was less provincial than the old B. that most people were wary of the new literature C. that World War I caused a dramatic change in America D. that centers of culture shifted from East to West Câu 56: It can be inferred from the first paragraph that the previous passage probably discussed_____________ A. new developments in industrialization and population shifts B. he importance of tradition to writers C. the limitations of American literature to this time D. the fashions and values of 19th century America Câu 57: The word “it” in the second paragraph refers to______________ A. the population B. the manufacturing C. the energy D. American literature Câu 58: The phrase “these years” in the third paragraph refers to ___________. A. the 1900s B. the present C. 1850-1900 D. the early 1800s Câu 59: This passage would probably be read in which of the following academic courses? A. Current events B. International affairs C. American literature D. European history Câu 60: All of the following can be inferred from the passage about the ne J literature EXCEPT____________ A. It broke with many literary traditions of the past B. It spoke to the issue of reform and change C. It was not highly regarded internationally D. It introduced new American themes, characters, and settings Câu 61: The word “exotic" in paragraph two is closest in meaning to_________ A. well-known B. old-fashioned C. unusual D. urban Câu 62: It can be inferred from the passage that Walt Whitman_____________ A. was disapproving of the new literature B. disliked urban life C. wrote Leaves of Grass D. was an international diplomat Câu 63: The word “evolved” in paragraph two is closest in meaning to______________ A. turned back B. became famous C. diminished D. changed Câu 64: The author uses the word “indeed” in the second paragraph for what purpose? A. To show a favorable attitude to these forms of literature. B. To emphasize the contrast he is making. C. For variety in a lengthy paragraph. D. To wind down his argument. ----------------------------------------------- WRITING Part I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Question 65: “I should say nothing about it if I were you” my brother said. My brother advised …………………………………………………………….. Question 66: The architect has drawn plans for an extension to the house. Plans ………………………………………………………………. Question 67: Everybody has agreed that changes to the scheme are necessary. Changes ……………………………………………………………….. Question 68: They are going to rebuild our kitchen next week. We ………………………………………………………………….. Question 69: The Presidential visit attracted such an enormous crowd that all traffic came to a standstill. So many people turned …………………………………………………………. Part II. In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the person in your family who you admire most. The following prompts may be helpful to you: + Who is the person you admire most in your family? + What does he/she look like? + What are his/her personalities? + Why do you admire him/her most? ----------------------------------------------- ----------- HẾT ---------- SỞ GD & ĐT VĨNH PHÚC ĐỀ KHẢO SÁT CHẤT LƯỢNG LẦN 1 LỚP 12 TRƯỜNG THPT YÊN LẠC NĂM HỌC 2015-2016 Đề thi có 05 trang ĐỀ THI MÔN: TIẾNG ANH Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút, không kể thời gian giao đề Mã đề thi 479 Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 1: My uncle, who is an accomplished guitarist, taught me how to play. A. unimpaired B. unskilled C. unqualified D. ill-educated Câu 2: The new laws to conserve wildlife in the area will come into force next month. A. destroy B. eliminate C. pollute D. protect Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Câu 3: A. pull B. look C. solution D. could Câu 4: A. comparison B. vision C. conclusion D. division Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) SIMILAR in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 5: I am concerned about my children. A. worried B. happy C. sad D. angry Câu 6: Although we argued with him for a long time, he stood his ground. A. wanted to continue B. felt sorry for us C. refused to change his decision D. changed his decision Câu 7: Every woman who had enough criteria can join the beauty contest irrespective of their background. A. on account of B. in consideration of C. under guarantee D. regardless of Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Câu 8: In 1959 the political philosopher Hannah Arendt became the first woman_______a full professor at Princeton University. A. to be appointed B. to appoint C. was appointed D. who be appointed as Câu 9: Mark first________ his wife three years ago when they_________at university. A. met/ were studying B. met/ had been studying C. has met/ studied D. met/ have studied Câu 10: __________with your friends and give me your answer tomorrow. A. Look into it B. Work it out C. Talk over it D. Talk it over Câu 11: Mike asked Sarah how long______English so far. A. she has been learning B. had she learned C. she learned D. she had been learning Câu 12: I am sorry I cannot hear what you________because everybody ______so loudly. A. were saying/ has talked B. said/ was talking C. have just said/ is talking D. are saying/ talk Câu 13: The visitors were complaining______in the rain. A. me about waiting B. about having to wait C. for waiting D. that they have to wait Câu 14: They______the job by this time tomorrow. A. will be finishing B. will finish C. will have finished D. are finishing Câu 15: Joanne is criticizing Alex for taking a late flight. Choose the most suitable response to fill in the blank in the following exchange. Joanne: “You should have flown with the earlier flight!” Alex: “___________________” A. It was fully booked. B. Oh, I’m sorry to hear that. C. Why not? D. Yes, I should Câu 16: Safety should take _________over all other matters in the workplace. A. precede B. precedent C. preceding D. precedence Câu 17: Any child has the right to an education________of sex, creed, race or nationality. A. regardless B. providing C. despite D. because Câu 18: Some sociologists believe that the_________family of parents and children is rapidly becoming a thing of the past. A. extended B. joint C. closed D. nuclear Câu 19: ______her tears, she waved goodbye to her family from the station platform. A. Filling out B. Fighting back C. Turn in over D. Bringing in Câu 20: Family_________later took on a much greater significance in his life. A. relation B. relatives C. relationships D. relations Câu 21: We arranged to meet at the station, but she didn’t___________. A. turn up B. wait on C. walk out D. get through Câu 22: Paul is asking Joe for permission to play the guitar in the room. Choose the most suitable response to fill in the blank in the following exchange. Paul: “Is it all right if I play the guitar in here while you’re studying?” Joe: “_____________________” A. Well, if only you didn’t. B. Oh, I wish you wouldn’t. C. Well, I’d rather not. D. Well, actually, I’d prefer it if you didn’t Câu 23: Your car is too dirty! When did you have it___________? A. to wash B. washed C. to be washed D. wash Câu 24: In Britain, most pupils transfer from primary to________school at the age of 11. A. secondary B. middle C. elementary D. upper Câu 25: _________, these students are among the best prepared who have been through this university. A. At the whole B. In the general C. In generally D. On the whole Câu 26: She said she met you once at the Parade last week. _________since? A. Did you meet her B. Had you met her C. Have you met her D. Were you met her Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. Ever since humans have inhabited the earth, they have made use of various forms of communication. Generally, this expression of thoughts and feelings has been in the form of oral speech. When there is a language barrier, communication is accomplished through sign language in which motions stand for letters, words, and ideas. Tourists, the deaf, and the mute have had to resort to this form of expression. Many of these symbols of whole words are very picturesque and exact and can be used internationally, spelling, however, cannot. Body language transmits ideas or thoughts by certain actions, either intentionally or unintentionally. A wink can be a way of flirting or indicating that the party is only joking. A nod signifies approval, while shaking the head indicates a negative reaction. Other forms of non-linguistic language can be found in Braille (a system of raised dots read with the fingertips), signal flags, Morse code, and smoke signals. Road maps and picture signs also guide, warn, and instruct people. While verbalization is the most common form of language, other systems and techniques also express human thoughts and feelings. Câu 27: All of the following statements are true EXCEPT______________ A. There are many forms of communication in existence today. B. The deaf and mute can use an oral form of communication. C. Ideas and thoughts can be transmitted by body language. D. Verbalization is the most common form of communication. Câu 28: Sign language is said to be very picturesque and exact and can be used internationally EXCEPT for_____________ A. ideas B. spelling C. whole words D. expressions Câu 29: Which form other than oral speech would be the most commonly be the most commonly used among blind people? A. Body language B. Signal flags C. Braille D. Picture signs Câu 30: Which of the following best summarizes this passage? A. Non-linguistic language is invaluable to foreigners. B. Everybody uses only one form of communication. C. Although other forms of communication exist, verbalization is the fastest. D. When language is a barrier, people will find other forms of communication. Câu 31: The word "wink" in the second paragraph means most nearly the same as______________ A. close two eyes briefly B. bob the head up and down C. close one eye briefly D. shake the head from side to side Câu 32: The word "these" in the first paragraph refers to__________- A. sign language motions B. tourists C. the deaf and the mute D. thoughts and feelings Câu 33: What would be MOST likely to use Morse code? A. A scientist B. A telegrapher C. spy D. An airline pilot Câu 34: How many different forms of communication are mentioned here? A. 7 B. 5 C. 11 D. 9 Câu 35: People need to communicate in order to_____________. A. keep from reading with their fingertips B. express thoughts and feelings C. be picturesque and exact D. create language barriers Câu 36: What is the best title for the passage? A. Ways of Expressing Feelings B. Picturesque Symbols of Communication C. The Importance of Sign Language D. The Many Forms of Communication Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. This rapid transcontinental settlement and these new urban industrial circumstances of the last half of the 19th century were accompanied by the development of a national literature of great abundance and variety. New themes, new forms, new subjects, new regions, new authors, new audiences all emerged in the literature of this half century. As a result, at the onset of World War I, the spirit and substance of American literature had evolved remarkably, just as its center of production had shifted from Boston to New York in the late 1880s and the sources of its energy to Chicago and the Midwest. No longer was it produced, at least in its popular forms, in the main by solemn, typically moralistic men from New England and the Old South; no longer were polite, well-dressed, grammatically correct, middle-class young people the only central characters in its narratives; no longer were these narratives to be set in exotic places and remote times; no longer, indeed, were fiction, poetry, drama, and formal history the chief acceptable forms of literary expression; no longer, finally, was literature read primarily by young, middle class women. In sum, American literature in these years fulfilled in considerable measure the condition Walt Whitman called for in 1867 in describing Leaves of Grass: it treats, he said of his own major work, each state and region as peers "and expands from them, and includes the world ... connecting an American citizen with the citizens of all nations." At the same time, these years saw the emergence of what has been designated "the literature of argument," powerful works in sociology, philosophy, psychology, many of them impelled by the spirit of exposure and reform. Just as America learned to play a role in this half century as an autonomous international political, economic, and military power, so did its literature establish itself as a producer of major works. Câu 37: The word “exotic" in paragraph two is closest in meaning to_________ A. well-known B. old-fashioned C. unusual D. urban Câu 38: The phrase “these years” in the third paragraph refers to ___________. A. the 1900s B. the present C. 1850-1900 D. the early 1800s Câu 39: It can be inferred from the passage that Walt Whitman_____________ A. was disapproving of the new literature B. disliked urban life C. wrote Leaves of Grass D. was an international diplomat Câu 40: It can be inferred from the first paragraph that the previous passage probably discussed_____________ A. the fashions and values of 19th century America B. he importance of tradition to writers C. the limitations of American literature to this time D. new developments in industrialization and population shifts Câu 41: The word “evolved” in paragraph two is closest in meaning to______________ A. became famous B. diminished C. turned back D. changed Câu 42: The main idea of this passage is____________ A. that centers of culture shifted from East to West B. that World War I caused a dramatic change in America C. that most people were wary of the new literature D. that the new American literature was less provincial than the old Câu 43: The author uses the word “indeed” in the second paragraph for what purpose? A. To show a favorable attitude to these forms of literature. B. To emphasize the contrast he is making. C. For variety in a lengthy paragraph. D. To wind down his argument. Câu 44: The word “it” in the second paragraph refers to______________ A. the energy B. American literature C. the manufacturing D. the population Câu 45: This passage would probably be read in which of the following academic courses? A. American literature B. European history C. International affairs D. Current events Câu 46: All of the following can be inferred from the passage about the ne J literature EXCEPT____________ A. It broke with many literary traditions of the past B. It spoke to the issue of reform and change C. It was not highly regarded internationally D. It introduced new American themes, characters, and settings Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of the primary stress in each of the following questions. Câu 47: A. determine B. marvelous C. compliment D. counterpart Câu 48: A. accountancy B. bewildered C. allegedly D. concentrate Câu 49: A. undergraduate B. certificate C. curriculum D. compulsory Mark the letter A, B C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Câu 50: The human brain is often comparing to a computer, but such an analogy can be misleading. A. comparing B. The human C. misleading D. but such Câu 51: The woman accused to shoplift was found not guilty and was acquitted A. not guilty B. to shoplift C. accused D. was acquitted Câu 52: While the teacher was explaining the some on the blackboard, the children threw paper aeroplanes around the classroom. A. threw B. around C. was explaining D. on the Câu 53: You can apply for a better job when you will have had more experience. A. when B. more experience C. will have had D. apply for Câu 54: Most college-age students today are interested in finding universities in which can pursue both academic and athletic extracurricular activities. A. interested in B. both C. Most D. which can Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B , C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks. Speech is one of the most important (55)______ communicating. It consists of far more than just making noises. To talk and also to (56)______ by other people, we have to speak a language, that is, we have to use combinations of (57)______ that everyone agrees to stand for a particular object or idea. Communication would be impossible if everyone made up their own language. Learning a language properly is very (58)______ . The basic (59)______ of English is not very large, and not only about 2,000 words are needed to speak it quite (60)______. But the more idea you can (61)______ the more precise you can be about their exact meaning. Words are the (62)______ thing we use in communicating what we want to say. The way we (63)______ the words is also very important. Our tone of voice can express many emotions and (64)______ whether we are pleased or angry, for instance. Câu 55: A. rules B. reason C. ways D. tests Câu 56: A. be understood B. be spoken C. be examined D. be talked Câu 57: A. talks B. sounds C. languages D. systems Câu 58: A. easy B. simple C. important D. expensive Câu 59: A. structure B. word C. vocabulary D. grammar Câu 60: A. perfect B. well C. fluent D. good Câu 61: A. pass B. express C. grow D. need Câu 62: A. certain B. main C. full D. most Câu 63: A. pass B. say C. send D. talk Câu 64: A. ask B. know C. understand D. show ----------------------------------------------- WRITING Part I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Question 65: “I should say nothing about it if I were you” my brother said. My brother advised …………………………………………………………….. Question 66: The architect has drawn plans for an extension to the house. Plans ………………………………………………………………. Question 67: Everybody has agreed that changes to the scheme are necessary. Changes ……………………………………………………………….. Question 68: They are going to rebuild our kitchen next week. We ………………………………………………………………….. Question 69: The Presidential visit attracted such an enormous crowd that all traffic came to a standstill. So many people turned …………………………………………………………. Part II. In about 150 words, write a paragraph about the person in your family who you admire most. The following prompts may be helpful to you: + Who is the person you admire most in your family? + What does he/she look like? + What are his/her personalities? + Why do you admire him/her most? ----------------------------------------------- ----------- HẾT ---------- ĐÁP ÁN TRẮC NGHIỆM Mã đề Câu hỏi Đáp án 130 1 D 130 2 C 130 3 C 130 4 A 130 5 A 130 6 C 130 7 B 130 8 B 130 9 C 130 10 D 130 11 A 130 12 C 130 13 C 130 14 B 130 15 C 130 16 A 130 17 C 130 18 C 130 19 B 130 20 B 130 21 A 130 22 D 130 23 B 130 24 A 130 25 D 130 26 B 130 27 D 130 28 D 130 29 D 130 30 A 130 31 A 130 32 B 130 33 D 130 34 C 130 35 A 130 36 D 130 37 D 130 38 D 130 39 A 130 40 C 130 41 B 130 42 B 130 43 C 130 44 A 130 45 C 130 46 C 130 47 A 130 48 A 130 49 A 130 50 B 130 51 D 130 52 B 130 53 C 130 54 B 130 55 D 130 56 B 130 57 B 130 58 D 130 59 A 130 60 D 130 61 D 130 62 C 130 63 A 130 64 B 207 1 A 207 2 A 207 3 B 207 4 B 207 5 A 207 6 C 207 7 A 207 8 A 207 9 B 207 10 D 207 11 D 207 12 A 207 13 C 207 14 A 207 15 A 207 16 D 207 17 C 207 18 C 207 19 C 207 20 B 207 21 D 207 22 B 207 23 C 207 24 B 207 25 B 207 26 D 207 27 B 207 28 C 207 29 B 207 30 C 207 31 D 207 32 B 207 33 A 207 34 A 207 35 A 207 36 A 207 37 C 207 38 D 207 39 C 207 40 A 207 41 C 207 42 D 207 43 C 207 44 C 207 45 C 207 46 D 207 47 D 207 48 B 207 49 A 207 50 D 207 51 B 207 52 D 207 53 D 207 54 C 207 55 D 207 56 A 207 57 B 207 58 A 207 59 B 207 60 D 207 61 B 207 62 C 207 63 B 207 64 D 361 1 B 361 2 C 361 3 D 361 4 D 361 5 D 361 6 B 361 7 C 361 8 A 361 9 B 361 10 D 361 11 D 361 12 B 361 13 A 361 14 A 361 15 B 361 16 A 361 17 B 361 18 D 361 19 D 361 20 B 361 21 A 361 22 A 361 23 D 361 24 D 361 25 A 361 26 C 361 27 A 361 28 B 361 29 C 361 30 B 361 31 C 361 32 C 361 33 B 361 34 D 361 35 D 361 36 C 361 37 B 361 38 D 361 39 A 361 40 C 361 41 C 361 42 D 361 43 A 361 44 B 361 45 C 361 46 C 361 47 A 361 48 A 361 49 B 361 50 A 361 51 B 361 52 B 361 53 A 361 54 D 361 55 A 361 56 A 361 57 D 361 58 C 361 59 C 361 60 C 361 61 C 361 62 C 361 63 D 361 64 B 479 1 B 479 2 A 479 3 C 479 4 A 479 5 A 479 6 C 479 7 D 479 8 A 479 9 A 479 10 D 479 11 D 479 12 C 479 13 B 479 14 C 479 15 A 479 16 D 479 17 A 479 18 D 479 19 B 479 20 C 479 21 A 479 22 D 479 23 B 479 24 A 479 25 D 479 26 C 479 27 B 479 28 B 479 29 C 479 30 D 479 31 C 479 32 A 479 33 B 479 34 D 479 35 B 479 36 D 479 37 C 479 38 C 479 39 C 479 40 D 479 41 D 479 42 D 479 43 B 479 44 B 479 45 A 479 46 C 479 47 A 479 48 D 479 49 A 479 50 A 479 51 B 479 52 A 479 53 C 479 54 D 479 55 C 479 56 A 479 57 B 479 58 C 479 59 C 479 60 B 479 61 B 479 62 B 479 63 B 479 64 D ĐÁP ÁN TỰ LUẬN PHẦN VIẾT (2 điểm) I (0,5 điểm) Câu 65: My brother advised me not to say/ to say nothing about it. Câu 66: Plans for an extension to the house have been drawn by the architect. Câu 67:Changes to the scheme have been agreed to be necessary. Câu 68: We are going to have our kitchen rebuilt next week. Câu 69: So many people turned out to see the President that all traffic came to a standstill. II. (1,5 điểm) Mô tả tiêu chí đánh giá điểm tối đa: 1. Bố cục (0,40 điểm) o Câu đề dẫn chủ đề mạch lạc o Bố cục hợp lí rõ ràng phù hợp yêu cầu của đề bài o Bố cục uyển chuyển từ mở bài đến kết luận 2. Phát triển ý (0,25 điểm) o Phát triển ý có trình tự logic o Có dẫn chứng, ví dụ, … đủ để bảo vệ ý kiến của mình 3. Sử dụng ngôn từ (0,30 điểm) o Sử dụng ngôn từ phù hợp nội dung o Sử dụng ngôn từ đúng văn phong/ thể loại o Sử dụng từ nối các ý cho bài viết uyển chuyển 4. Nội dung (0,30 điểm) o Đủ thuyết phục người đọc o Đủ dẫn chứng, ví dụ, lập luận o Độ dài: Số từ không nhiều hơn hoặc ít hơn so với quy định 5% 5. Ngữ pháp, dấu câu, và chính tả: (0,25 điểm) o Sử dụng đúng dấu câu o Chính tả: Viết đúng chính tả. Lỗi chính tả gây hiểu nhầm/ sai lệch ý sẽ bị tính một lỗi (trừ 1% điểm của bài viết). Cùng một lỗi chính tả lặp lại chỉ tính là một lỗi o Sử dụng đúng thời, thể, cấu trúc câu đúng ngữ pháp.(Lỗi ngữ pháp gây hiểu nhầm/ sai lệch ý sẽ bị trừ 1% điểm bài viết.) Tổng: 1,50 SỞ GIÁO DỤC & ĐÀO TẠO VĨNH PHÚC ĐỀ KSCL LẦN 1 NĂM HỌC 2015 - 2016 TRƯỜNG THPT PHẠM CÔNG BÌNH (Đề thi có 05 trang) MÔN TIẾNG ANH Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút, không kể thời gian phát đề Mã đề thi 359 Section A (8 points) Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. Who talk more – men or women? Most people believe that women talk more. However, linguist Deborah Tannen, who has studied the communication style of men and women, says that this is a stereotype. According to Tannen, women are more verbal – talk more – in private situations, where they use conversation as the “glue” to hold relationships together. But, she says, men talk more in public situations, where they use conversation to exchange information and gain status. Tannen points out that we can see these differences even in children. Little girls often play with one “best friend”, their play includes a lot of conversation. Little boys often play games in groups; their play usually involves more doing than talking. In school, girls are often better at verbal skills, boys are often better at mathematics. A recent study at Emory University helps to shed light on the roots of this difference. Researchers studied conversation between children age 3-6 and their parents. They found evidence that parents talk very differently to their son than they do to their daughters. The startling conclusion was that parents use more language with their girls. Specifically, when parents talk with their daughters, they use more descriptive language and more details. There is also far more talk about emotions, especially sadness, with daughters than with sons. Câu 1: Which sentence best expresses the main idea of the first paragraph? A. Women talk more in private, and men talk more in public B. It’s stereotype that women talk more than men C. Little girls and little boys have different ways of playing D. Women talk more than men Câu 2: Which word is similar in meaning to “glue” in line 4 ? A. means B. sticky substance C. game D. rope Câu 3: Which sentence best expresses the main idea of the second paragraph? A. Parents do not talk much about sadness with their sons. B. An Emory University found that parents talk more with their daughters than with their sons. C. Study at Emory University can help to explain the differences between communication styles of boys and girls D. Researchers have studied the conversations of children and their parents. Câu 4: Which of the following phrases best explains the meaning of the word “verbal”? A. connected with the use of spoken language B. deriving from verbs C. using very loud noise D. being very talkative Câu 5: The word they in line 4 refers to A. men and women B. situations. C. men D. women Câu 6: Which can be used as a synonym of the word “emotions” ? A. thinking B. anger C. feelings D. worries Câu 7: Which of the following statements can be inferred from the first paragraph ? A. Men are more sociable than women. B. According to Deborah Tannen, the belief that women talk more is partly right but most wrong and oversimplified C. Men and women have different styles of talking, which may begin in childhood. D. Women talk more in some situations, men talk more in others. Câu 8: Which word could best replace “startling” ? A. interesting B. surprising C. annoying D. beginning Page 1 of 6. Mã đề 359 Câu 9: Which of the following statements can be inferred from the second paragraph? A. Girls have more practice discussing sadness than boys do. B. A recent study found that parents talk differently to their sons and daughters. C. Boys don’t like to be with their parents as much as girls do. D. Parents don’t enjoy talking with their sons as much as with their daughters. Câu 10: Which of the following statements is TRUE about the passage? A. Girls are thought to be more talkative than boys. B. Parents use more language to talk with their daughters. C. Parents give more love to their daughters than their sons. D. Boys don’t like showing their emotions. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the rest in the position of the main stress in each of the following questions. Câu 11: A. obedience B. embarrass C. attitude D. apparent Câu 12: A. component B. confiding C. necessary D. important Câu 13: A. begin B. addick C. refer D. regret Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word. HEALTH AND HAPPINESS Health experts suggest that ……[<1>]….... healthy and happy, it’s important to keep our lives in balance. Chinese philosophy, which has spanned thousands of years, uses the principles of yin and yang to explain the importance of balance in life. Explained simply, yang represents the active elements of the universe, ……[<2>]….... the yin represents the passive elements. This expresses the importance of balance in ……[<3>]….... of living. Today health experts agree that it’s important to have a balanced life. For example, they’ve said it’s necessary to have a balance between work and rest and to have a balanced exercise program. ……[<4>]…...., I’m sure you’d agree that in our busy world, it’s not always easy to get and keep balance in our lives. ……[<5>]….... business or study deadlines, many people work to excess, leaving little time at the end of their busy day to spend with family and friends. They eat fast - food and don’t get enough rest or recreation and then suffer badly from the effects of stress. It’s sad that this situation often happens when people believe that access to ……[<6>]….... is the answer to happiness instead of understanding the importance of balanced living. While ambition can be a good thing, ……[<7>]….... too much ambition can cause a person to become ‘out of balance’. Of course it’s also unbalanced to spend too much time on entertainment and pleasure activities, with little or no time ……[<8>]….... to work or education. Balance means allocating enough time for all the important aspects of life, such as spending time with family and friends, working or studying, as well as resting and relaxing. Experts now tell us that having balance in our life is the answer, not only to health and happiness, ……[<9>]….... to success. If you’re balanced, you’ll have more energy and you’ll reach your ambitions in a more relaxed fashion; with less stress. So ……[<10>]….... is your life? Do you need to allocate your time differently to have better balance in your life? Câu 14: A. looking B. to preserve C. remain D. to stay Câu 15: A. whereas B. in contrast C. although D. on the other hand Câu 16: A. all areas B. all angles C. every field D. all aspects Câu 17: A. Simultaneously B. However C. Consequently D. On the contrary Câu 18: A. Despite B. Although C. Because D. Due to Câu 19: A. have money B. properties C. wealth D. rich Câu 20: A. having B. with C. have D. there is Câu 21: A. giving B. allocated C. spent D. used Câu 22: A. but it is the answer B. also C. and also D. but also Câu 23: A. how balanced B. however balanced C. what balance D. how balancing Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the rest in each of the following questions. Câu 24: A. introduces B. leaves C. practices D. wishes Câu 25: A. dough B. county C. blouse D. doubt Page 2 of 6. Mã đề 359 Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to show the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Câu 26: Not until I got on the taxi to the airport that I realized I had left my passport at home. A. that I realized B. that I had left C. at home D. got on Câu 27: Dams are used to control flooding, provide water for irrigation and generating electricity for the surrounding area. A. irrigation B. to control flooding C. generating D. surrounding area Câu 28: She asked why did Mathew look so embarrassed when he saw Carole A. did Mathew look B. asked why C. saw D. embarassed Câu 29: Married customs differ greatly from society to society. A. Married B. society C. differ D. greatly Câu 30: It is the high time John understands how to behave properly towards the old men. A. understands B. high C. towards D. how to Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions. A number of factors related to the voice reveal the personality of the speaker. The first is the broad area of communication, which includes imparting information by use of language, communicating with a group or an individual, and specialized communication through performance. A person conveys thoughts and ideas through choice of words, by a tone of voice that is pleasant or unpleasant, gentle or harsh, by the rhythm that is inherent within the language itself, and by speech rhythms that are flowing and regular or uneven and hesitant, and finally, by the pitch and melody of the utterance. When speaking before a group, a person's tone may indicate unsureness or fright, confidence or calm. At interpersonal levels, the tone may reflect ideas and feelings over and above the words chosen, or may belie them. Here the speaker's tone can consciously or unconsciously reflect intuitive sympathy or antipathy, lack of concern or interest, fatigue, anxiety, enthusiasm or excitement, all of which are usually discernible by the acute listener. Public performance is a manner of communication that is highly specialized with its own techniques for obtaining effects by voice and /or gesture. The motivation derived from the text, and in the case of singing, the music, in combination with the performer's skills, personality, and ability to create empathy will determine the success of artistic, political, or pedagogic communication. Second, the voice gives psychological clues to a person's self-image, perception of others, and emotional health. Self-image can be indicated by a tone of voice that is confident, pretentious, shy, aggressive, outgoing, or exuberant, to name only a few personality traits. Also the sound may give a clue to the facade or mask of that person, for example, a shy person hiding behind an overconfident front. How a speaker perceives the listener's receptiveness, interest, or sympathy in any given conversation can drastically alter the tone of presentation, by encouraging or discouraging the speaker. Emotional health is evidenced in the voice by free and melodic sounds of the happy, by constricted and harsh sound of the angry, and by dull and lethargic qualities of the depressed. Câu 31: What does the passage mainly discuss? A. The function of the voice in performance B. The production of speech C. The connection between voice and personality D. Communication styles Câu 32: What does the author mean by staring that, "At interpersonal levels, tone may reflect ideas and feelings over and above the words chosen" (lines 7-8)? A. The tone of voice can carry information beyond the meaning of words. B. A high tone of voice reflects an emotional communication. C. Feelings are more difficult to express than ideas. D. Feelings are expressed with different words than ideas are. Câu 33: The word "Here" in line 8 refers to _______. A. ideas and feelings B. the tone C. words chosen D. interpersonal interactions Page 3 of 6. Mã đề 359 Câu 34: The word "derived" in line 12 is closest in meaning to _______. A. discussed B. registered C. prepared D. obtained Câu 35: Why does the author mention "artistic, political, or pedagogic communication" in line 13? A. As examples of basic styles of communication B. As examples of public performance C. To introduce the idea of self-image D. To contrast them to singing Câu 36: According to the passage, an exuberant tone of voice, may be an indication of a person's _______. A. personality B. general physical health C. ability to communicate D. vocal quality Câu 37: According to the passage, an overconfident front may hide _______. A. strength B. friendliness C. shyness D. hostility Câu 38: The word "drastically" in line 19 is closest in meaning to _______. A. severely B. easily C. exactly D. frequently Câu 39: The word "evidenced" in line 20 is closest in meaning to _______. A. indicated B. repeated C. exaggerated D. questioned Câu 40: According to the passage, what does a constricted and harsh voice indicate? A. Depression B. Anger C. Lethargy D. Boredom Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Câu 41: Everyone in both cars _____ injured in the accident last night, ______? A. was/weren't they B. was/wasn't he? C. were/were they D. were/weren't they Câu 42: Linda: "It's been a tough couple of months, but I think the worst is behind us now." Jill: " _______. " A. Good morning. B. Good luck! C. Good! D. Goodness me! Câu 43: “What a new nice style of hair you have it cut!” ~ “____.” A. No, I think it’s suitable for me. B. It’s from Italy C. Thank you D. Yes, please Câu 44: Peter: “I’ve got to go, Betty. So long." Betty: “So long, Peter. And _______.” A. don’t hurry B. don’t take C. be careful D. take care Câu 45: It took the director two hours _______. A. to explain us the new plan B. explaining the new plan to us C. to explain the new plan to us D. explaining us the new plan Câu 46: Traditionally, Americans and Asians have very different ideas ________ love and marriage. A. to B. about C. at D. in Câu 47: Tuan, along with his friends, ___________ on a picnic in Pu Mat National Park at the end of this month. A. is going B. will go C. have to go D. are going Câu 48: The government has had new houses _______ in the rural areas. A. build B. to be built C. building D. built Câu 49: If I had studied harder, I_________________better in the last exam. A. wouldn’t have done B. would have done C. had done D. would do Câu 50: Please cut my hair …………….the style in this magazine. A. the same long like B. the same long as C. the same length as D. the same length like Câu 51: In a few hours, we_______ the test, and we’ll go home and rest. A. will be finishing B. have finished C. will have finished D. are finishing Câu 52: The more you practise your English, ________ . A. the faster you will learn B. the faster will you learn C. you will learn faster D. faster you will learn Câu 53: Mark is nearsighted. He ___ glasses ever since he was ten years old A. should have worn B. has had to wear C. need wear D. must wear Page 4 of 6. Mã đề 359 Câu 54: _______ to China if you had the chance? A. Do you go B. Had you gone C. You go D. Would you go Câu 55: The mirror was ______ broken. A. accidental B. by accident C. accidentally D. accident Câu 56: To sail single-handed across the ocean takes both skill and _________. A. determine B. determining C. determined D. determination Câu 57: It is imperative that he _____ the school regulations. A. would obey B. obey C. will obey D. obeys Câu 58: It took years of research, but ____ they found the answer. A. last B. lastly C. at the end D. in the end Câu 59: It is very difficult to…………the exact meaning of an idiom in a foreign language. A. exchange B. convert C. transfer D. convey Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Câu 60: Certain courses are compulsory; others are optional. A. free B. voluntary C. pressure D. mandatory Câu 61: She is a very generous old woman. She has given most of her wealth to a charity organization. A. amicable B. hospitable C. kind D. mean Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word or phrase that is CLOSEST in meaning to the underlined part in each of the following questions. Câu 62: I will communicate with you as soon as I have any news. A. be interested in B. get in touch C. have connection D. be related Câu 63: In the first two decades of its existence, the cinema developed rapidly. A. stressed B. enlarged C. progressed D. ripened Câu 64: The girls were deeply affected by that sentimental movie. A. influenced B. touched C. annoyed D. sad Section B (2 points) I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Write your answers on your answer sheet. 1. I've never gone to the car wash before. This is ..................................................................................................................................................... 2. Jane gave me a present on my last birthday. I was ........................................................................................................................................................ 3. The children couldn't go swimming because the sea was very rough. The sea was too ................................................................................................................................... 4 “Don’t forget to put your name on the top of the page” he said to her He reminded ......................................................................................................................................... 5. If you are not careful, you’ll cut yourself Unless ..................................................................................................................................................... II. In about 140 words, write a paragraph about the benefits of social network. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet. The following prompts might be helpful to you. - Making friends easily - Updating news - Relaxing. Page 5 of 6. Mã đề 359 Key 1. D 2. B 3. A 4. A 5. C 6. C 7. C 8. B 9. D 10. B 11. C 12. C 13. B 14. D 15. A 16. D 17. B 18. D 19. C 20. A 21. B 22. D 23. A 24. B 25. A 26. A 27. C 28. A 29. A 30. A 31. C 32. A 33. D 34. D 35. B 36. A 37. C 38. A 39. A 40. B 41. A 42. C 43. C 44. D 45. C 46. B 47. A 48. D 49. B 50. C 51. C 52. A 53. B 54. D 55. C 56. D 57. B 58. D 59. D 60. D 61. D 62. B 63. C 64. B Section B I. (0.5 điểm; 1 câu = 0.1) 1. This is the first time I have ever gone to the car wash 2. I was given a present on my last birthday by Jane. 3. The sea was too rough for the children to go swimming 4. He reminded her to put her name on the top of the page. 5. Unless you are careful, you will cut yourself. II. Viết (1.5 điểm) Page 6 of 6. Mã đề 359 SỞ GD&ĐT BẮC GIANG ĐỀ THI THỬ KỲ THI THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN 2 TRƯỜNG THPT NGÔ SĨ LIÊN Năm học 2015 - 2016 Môn: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 12 Đề thi có 06 trang Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Không kể thời gian phát đề) (Học sinh làm phần trắc nghiệm 64 câu vào phiếu trả lời trắc nghiệm và Mã đề thi 216 phần tự luận vào mặt sau của phiếu trả lời.) SECTION A (8 points) Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Question1: A. character B. switch C. chemical D. christmas Question2: A. addition B. advantage C. adventure D. advertise Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question3: It is __________ work of art that everyone wants to have a look at it. A. such unusual a B. such an unusual C. so an unusual D. a so unusual Question4: As a millionaire who liked to show off her wealth, Mrs. Smith paid __________we asked. A. four times as much as B. four time as many as C. four times much as D. four time much than Question5: __________, I would give a party. A. Should she come next month B. If she come next month C. She were to come next month D. If she came here now Question6: He was very lucky when he fell off the ladder. He _____ himself. A. must have hurt B. should have hurt C. will have hurt D. could have hurt Question7: The teacher, along with her students, __________ going to school at the moment. A. is B. was C. were D. are Question8: Her mother, __________ has been working for thirty years, is retiring next month. A. whose B. whom C. that D. who Question9: The man ______ at the blackboard is our teacher. A. standing B. to stand C. stood D. stands Question10: In a formal interview, it is essential to maintain good eye __________ with the interviewers. A. contact B. touch C. link D. connection Question11: We are going to __________ A. have our house be redecorated B. have our house redecorated C. have our house to be redecorated D. get our house being redecorated Question12: I suggest the room __________before Christmas. A. be decorated B. were decorated C. should decorate D. is decorated Question13: "Your parents must be proud of your result at school". - "_______" A. I am glad you like it. B. Sorry to hear that. C. Thanks. It's certainly encouraging. D. Of course Question14: The theory of relativity __________ by Einstein, who was a famous physicist. A. is developed B. developed C. develops D. was developed Question15: Without my parents' support, ___________my overseas study. A. had not completed B. would not have completed C. will not complete D. did not complete Question16: She isn’t __________ well with the new manager. A. going on B. keeping on C. taking on D. getting on Question17: The last student ___________ was John. Trang 1/7 - Mã đề thi 216 A. to be interviewed B. who is interviewed C. whom was interviewed D. for interviewed Question18: You should look up the meaning of the new in the dictionary _______ misuse it A. so as to B. to C. so as not to D. so that Question19: ___________ is to give strangers your address. A. What must never you do B. That must never you do C. That you must never do D. What you must never do Question20: Maria: “I’m taking my end-of-term examination tomorrow.” Sarah: “__________.” A. Good day B. Good luck C. Good time D. Good chance Question21: They asked me a lot of questions, __________ I couldn’t answer. A. most of which B. of which most C. most of that D. of that most Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose stress differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Question22: A. kindergarten B. Contaminate C. curriculum D. conventional Question23: A. attend B. visit C. apply D. appear Question24: A. attendance B. security C. obedient D. candidate Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) CLOSEST in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question25: I received housing benefit when I was unemployed. A. out of work B. out of practice C. out of fashion D. out of order Question26: Before the interview, you have to send a letter of application and your résumé to the company. A. recommendation B. photograph C. reference D. curriculum vitae Question27: GCSEs are not compulsory, but they are the most common qualifications taken by 14-16- year-old students. A. fulfilled B. required C. specialized D. applied Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question28: “That is a well-behaved boy whose behavior has nothing to complain about” A. behaving nice B. behaving cleverly C. good behavior D. behaving improperly Question29: Punctuality is imperative in your new job. A. Being late B. Being cheerful C. Being courteous D. Being efficient Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question30: The assumption that smoking has bad effects on our health have been proved. A B C D Question31: I like the fresh air and green trees of the village which I spent my vacation last year. A B C D Question32: The General Certificate of Secondary Education (GCSE) is the name of a set of English A B qualifications, generally taking by secondary school students at the age of 15-16 in England. C D Question33: Full-time jobs for men are declining, while more women are finding part- and full-time A work. The result is declining social status for men so they lose their role as the sole financial provider. B C D Question34: I told him I'd prefer to walk , but he insisted to give me a lift . A B C D Trang 2/7 - Mã đề thi 216 Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks from 35 to 44. You will make the interview process easier for the employer if you prepare relevant information about yourself. Think about how you want to present your (35)____, experiences, education, work style, skills, and goals. Be prepared to supplement all your answers with examples that support the statements you make. It is also a good idea to review your resume with a critical eye and (36) ____ areas that an employer might see as limitations or want further information. Think about how you can answer difficult' questions (37) ____ and positively, while keeping each answer brief. An interview gives the employer a (38)_____ to get to know you. While you do want to market yourself to the employer, answer each question with an honest (39) _____. Never say anything negative about past experiences, employers, or courses and professors. Always think of something positive about an experience and talk about that. You should also be (40) ____. If you are genuinely interested (41) _____ the job, let the interviewer know that. One of the best ways to show you are keen on a job is to demonstrate that you have researched the organization prior to the interview. You can also (42) ____ interest by asking questions about the job, the organization, and its services and products. The best way to impress an employer is to ask questions that build upon your interview discussion. This shows you are interested and (43) ____ close attention to the interviewer. It is a good idea to prepare a few questions in advance, but an insightful comment based on your conversation can make an even stronger statement. At the (44) _____ of an interview, it is appropriate for you to ask when you may expect to hear; from the employer. Question35: A. pressures B. strengths C. practices D. promotions Question36: A. hide B. limit C. express D. identify Question37: A. accurately B. rightly C. hardly D. sharply Question38: A. change B. practice C. way D. chance Question39: A. ability B. response C. expression D. respect Question40: A. enthusiast B. enthusiasm C. enthusiastic D. enthusiastically Question41: A. for B. on C. with D. in Question42: A. appear B. show C. conceal D. cover Question43: A. spend B. pay C. choose D. make Question44: A. end B. close C. finish D. final Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 45 to 54. A survey is a study, generally in the form of an interview or a questionnaire, which provides information concerning how people think and act. In the United States, the best-known surveys are the Gallup poll and the Harris poll. As anyone who watches the news during campaigns presidential knows, these polls have become an important part of political life in the United States. North Americans are familiar with the many “person on the street” interviews on local television news shows. While such interviews can be highly entertaining, they are not necessarily an accurate indication of public opinion. First, they reflect the opinions of only those people who appear at a certain location. Thus, such samples can be biased in favor of commuters, middle-class shoppers, or factory workers, depending on which area the news people select. Second, television interviews tend to attract outgoing people who are willing to appear on the air, while they frighten away others who may feel intimidated by a camera. A survey must be based on a precise, representative sampling if it is to genuinely reflect a broad range of the population. In preparing to conduct a survey, sociologists must exercise great care in the wording of questions. An effective survey question must be simple and clear enough for people to understand it. It must also be specific enough so that there are no problems in interpreting the results. Even questions that are less structured must be carefully phrased in order to elicit the type of information desired. Surveys can be indispensable sources of information, but only if the sampling is done properly and the questions are worded accurately. Trang 3/7 - Mã đề thi 216 There are two main forms of surveys: the interview and the questionnaire. Each of these forms of survey research has its advantages. An interviewer can obtain a high response rate because people find it more difficult to turn down a personal request for an interview than to throw away a written questionnaire. In addition, an interviewer can go beyond written questions and probe for a subject’s underlying feelings and reasons. However, questionnaires have the advantage of being cheaper and more consistent. Question45: What does the passage mainly discuss? A. The principles of conducting surveys B. The importance of polls in American political life C. The history of surveys in North America D. Problems associated with interpreting surveys Question46: The word "they" in line 7 refers to______. A. interviews B. news shows C. North Americans D. opinions Question47: According to the passage, the main disadvantage of person-on-the-street interviews is that they A. reflect political opinions B. are used only on television C. are not carefully worded D. are not based on a representative sampling Question48: The word "precise" in line 10 is closest in meaning to______. A. rational B. accurate C. required D. planned Question49: According to paragraph 3, which of the following is most important for an effective survey? A. An interviewer's ability to measure respondents' feelings B. Carefully worded questions C. A sociologist who is able to interpret the results D. A high number of respondents Question50: The word "exercise" in line 12 is closest in meaning to______. A. consider B. design C. utilize D. defend Question51: The word "elicit" in line 15 is closest in meaning to______. A. rule out B. bring out C. predict D. compose Question52: It can be inferred from the passage that one reason that sociologists may become frustrated with questionnaires is that______. A. respondents are too eager to supplement questions with their own opinions B. respondents often do not complete and return questionnaires C. questionnaires are expensive and difficult to distribute D. questionnaires are often difficult to read Question53: According to the passage, one advantage of live interviews over questionnaires is that live interviews______. A. minimize the influence of the researcher B. are easier to interpret C. can produce more information D. cost less Question54: Which of the following terms is defined in the passage? A. Representative sampling B. Response rate C. Public opinion D. Survey Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 55 to 64. Although most universities in the United States are on a semester system, which offers classes in the fall and spring, some schools observe a quarter system comprised of fall, winter, spring, and summer quarters. The academic year, September to June, is divided into three quarters of eleven weeks each beginning in September, January, and March: the summer quarter, June to August, is composed of shorter sessions of vary length. Trang 4/7 - Mã đề thi 216 There are several advantages and disadvantages to the quarter system. On the plus side, students who wish to complete their degrees in less than the customary four years may take advantage of the opportunity to study year round by enrolling in all four quarters. In addition, although most students begin their programs in the fall quarter, they may enter at the beginning of any other quarters. Finally, since the physical facilities are kept in operation year round, the resources are used effectively to serve the greatest number of students. But there are several disadvantages as well. Many faculty complain that eleven-week term is simply not enough for them to cover the material required by most college coursed. Students also find it difficult to complete the assignments in such a short period of time. In order to combine the advantages of the quarter system with those of the semester system some colleges and universities have instituted a three-term trimester system. In fourteen weeks, faculty and students have more time to cover material and finish course requirements, but the additional term provides options for admission during the year and accelerates the degree programs for those students who wish to graduate early. Question55: Which of the following would be the best title for this passage? A. The Semester System B. The Academic Year C. Universities in the United States D. The Quarter System Question56: A semester system______. A. has two major sessions a year B. Isn’t very popular in the United States C. gives students the opportunity to study year round D. has eleven-week sessions Question57: How many terms are there in a quarter system? A. Three regular terms and one summer term B. One regular term and four summer terms C. Two regular terms and two summer terms D. Four regular terms and one summer term Question58: When is the academic year? A. September to August B. September to June C. June to August D. August to June Question59: The word “ customary” in paragraph 2 could best be replaced by______. A. agreeable B. limited C. traditional D. length Question60: When may students begin studying in a school that uses a quarter system? A. Summer semester only B. at the beginning of the academic year C. at the beginning of any quarter D. September Question61: The word “them” in paragraph 2 refers to______. A. material B. courses C. faculty D. weeks Question62: The word “instituted” in paragraph 3 is closest in meaning to______. A. recommended B. attempted C. established D. considered Question63: Which of the following characteristics does NOT apply to trimesters? A. they provide more options for admission B. They allow students to graduate early C. they last eleven weeks D. They are long enough to cover the course material Question64: Where would this passage most probably be found? A. In a American newspaper B. In a dictionary published in the United States C. In a general guide to colleges and universities in the United States D. In a college catalog for a university in the United States Trang 5/7 - Mã đề thi 216 SECTION B (2 points) I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Write your answers on your answer sheet. Question 65. Although he was very tired, he agreed to help me with my homework. Tired as________________________________________________________________________ Question 66. The bus driver cannot be blamed for the accident in any way. In no__________________________________________________________________________ Question 67. There is a rumour that the guy stole the car. It is ___________________________________________________________________________ Question 68. We didn’t go on holiday because we didn’t have enough money. If we __________________________________________________________________________ Question 69. I was not surprised to hear that Harry had failed his driving test. It came as______________________________________________________________________ II. In about 140 words, write a paragraph about your future job after leaving school . Write your paragraph on your answer sheet. Đáp án 1 B 17 A 33 C 49 B 2 D 18 C 34 C 50 C 3 B 19 D 35 B 51 B 4 A 20 B 36 D 52 B 5 D 21 A 37 A 53 C 6 D 22 A 38 A 54 D 7 A 23 B 39 B 55 D 8 D 24 D 40 C 56 A 9 A 25 A 41 D 57 A 10 A 26 D 42 B 58 B 11 B 27 B 43 B 59 C 12 A 28 D 44 A 60 C 13 C 29 A 45 A 61 C 14 D 30 D 46 A 62 C 15 B 31 C 47 D 63 C 16 D 32 C 48 B 64 C SECTION B (2 points) I. 0.1 x 5 = 0.5 Question65. Tired as he was, he agreed to help me with my homework. Question66. In no way can the bus driver be blamed for the accident. . Question67. It is rumoured that the guy stole it. Question68. If we had had enough mone, we would have gone on holiday. Question69. It came as no surprise to me that Harry had failed his driving test. II. 1.5 (point ) Mô tả tiêu chí đánh giá: 1. Bố cục (0,40 điểm) o Câu đề dẫn chủ đề mạch lạc o Bố cục hợp lí rõ ràng phù hợp yêu cầu của đề bài o Bố cục uyển chuyển từ mở bài đến kết luận 2. Phát triển ý (0,25 điểm) o Phát triển ý có trình tự logic o Có dẫn chứng, ví dụ, … đủ để bảo vệ ý kiến của Trang 6/7 - Mã đề thi 216 mình 3. Sử dụng ngôn từ (0,30 điểm) o Sử dụng ngôn từ phù hợp nội dung 4. Nội dung (0,30 điểm) o Đủ thuyết phục người đọc o Đủ dẫn chứng, ví dụ, lập luận o Độ dài: Số từ không nhiều hơn hoặc ít hơn so với quy định 5% 5. Ngữ pháp, dấu câu, và chính tả (0,25 điểm) o Sử dụng đúng dấu câu o Chính tả: Viết đúng chính tả _ Lỗi chính tả gây hiểu nhầm / sai lệch ý sẽ bị tính một lỗi (trừ 1% điểm của bài viết) _ Cùng một lỗi chính tả lặp lại chỉ tính là một lỗi o Sử dụng đúng thời, thể, cấu trúc câu đúng ngữ pháp. (Lỗi ngữ pháp gây hiểu nhầm / sai lệch ý sẽ bị trừ 1% điểm bài viết) o Sử dụng ngôn từ đúng văn phong / thể loại o Sử dụng từ nối các ý cho bài viết uyển chuyển Trang 7/7 - Mã đề thi 216 SỞ GD&ĐT BẮC GIANG ĐỀ THI THỬ KỲ THI THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN 1 TRƯỜNG THPT NGÔ SĨ LIÊN Năm học 2015 - 2016 Môn: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 12 Đề thi có 06 trang Thời gian làm bài: 90 phút (Không kể thời gian phát đề) (Học sinh làm phần trắc nghiệm 64 câu vào phiếu trả lời trắc nghiệm và Mã đề thi 156 phần tự luận vào giấy thi.) SECTION A (8 points) Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word whose underlined part differs from the other three in pronunciation in each of the following questions. Question 1. A. attracted B. attended C. confided D. promised Question 2. A. communication B. culture C. ceremony D. compliment Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the other three in the position of primary stress in each of the following questions. Question 3. A. attract B. decide C. precede D. culture Question 4. A. determine B. tradition C. sacrifice D. terrific Question 5. A. informality B. socialise C. mischievous D. confidence Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the following questions. Question 6. Thank you for your compliment _______ my achievements. A. to B. with C. from D. on Question 7. I’m afraid a rise in salary is _______ just now. A. out of sight B. out of the question C. out of control D. out of date Question 8. They laughed a lot last night. The film _______ have been very funny. A. can B. would C. ought D. must Question 9. After the test papers _______ to the students in class tomorrow, the students _______ their next assignment. A. will return – will be given B. will be returned – are given C. are returning – are giving D. are returned – will be given Question 10. I have not found the book _______ our teacher advised us to read. A. whom B. which C. who D. when Question 11. If he had tried his best, he _______ accepted to that university. A. would have B. would have been C. would be D. will be Question 12. He’d prefer _______ chicken soup rather than _______ eel soup. A. to have – have B. have – have C. to have – having D. having – to have Question 13. Barbara is motivated to study _______ she knows that a good education can improve her life. A. although B. so that C. because D. but Question 14. My family is the base from which we can go into the world with _______. A. confide B. confidence C. confident D. confiding Question 15. _______ signals such as waving, nodding or shaking of the head also have cultural meanings. A. Verbal B. Non-verbal C. Visual D. Oral Trang 1/6 – Mã đề thi 156 Question 16. Air is _______ mainly of nitrogen and oxygen. A. created B. consisted C. composed D. included Question 17. It is important to have someone you can confide _______. A. from B. to C. in D. with Question 18. I admired the _______ cars at the car show. A. expensive new German B. new expensive German C. German expensive new D. new German expensive Question 19. A quick look would reveal that France has _______ computers. A. as many twice televisions as B. twice more televisions than C. twice as many televisions as D. as twice many televisions as Question 20. Your grades are coming down. You should try to _______ the other students in your class. A. get out of B. get along with C. keep away from D. keep up with Question 21. Only when you become a parent _______ what true responsibility is. A. you will understand B. will you understand C. you understand D. you can understand Question 22. It is essential that every student _______ the exam before attending the course. A. passes B. passed C. pass D. would pass Question 23. Mickey: “_______” Minnie: “Oh, thank you. I just got it yesterday” A. That’s a beautiful dress you are wearing. B. When did you buy this beautiful dress? C. Who gave you this beautiful dress? D. You’ve just bought this beautiful dress, haven’t you? Question 24. Teacher: “Tom, you’ve written a much better essay this time.” Tom: “_______” A. Writing? Why? B. Thank you. It’s really encouraging. C. You’re welcome. D. What did you say? I’m so shy. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) CLOSEST in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 25. Many education courses require both oral and written presentations before degrees are awarded. A. prepared B. spoken C. excellent D. understood Question 26. Although he is recognized as one of the most brilliant scientists in his field, Professor White cannot seem to make his ideas understood in class. A. get his ideas down B. recall his ideas C. summarize his ideas D. get his ideas across Question 27. Professor Berg was very interested in the diversity of cultures all over the world. A. variety B. changes C. conservation D. number Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 28. I would be happy to go along with the idea. A. to disagree with the idea B. to agree with the idea C. to support the idea D. to approve with the idea Question 29. He had never experienced such discourtesy towards the president as it occurred at the annual meeting in May. A. politeness B. rudeness C. measurement D. encouragement Trang 2/6 – Mã đề thi 156 Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 30. The number of students attending the seminar are smaller than registration numbers. A B C D Question 31. Preceding by four nice children, the bride and the groom entered the wedding hall. A B C D Question 32. The examination will test your ability to understand spoken English, to read non-technical A B C language, and writing correctly. D Question 33. The better the weather is, the most crowded the beaches get. A B C D Question 34. It’s about time you decide whether to enter university or get a job. A B C D Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks from 35 to 44. Speech is one of the most important (35)___ of communicating .It consists of far more than just making noises . To talk and also (36)___ to by other people, we have to speak a language ,that is, we have to use combinations of (37)____that everyone agrees to stand for a particular object or idea. Communication would be impossible if everyone made up their own language. Learning a language properly is very (38)___. The basic (39)____of English is not very large, and not only about 2,000 words are needed to speak it quite (40)___.But the more idea you can (41)____ the more precise you can be about their exact meaning. Words are the (42)____thing we use in communicating what we want to say. The way we (43)____the words is also very important. Our tone of voice can express many emotions and (44)____ whether we are pleased or angry, for instance. Question 35. A. reason B. tests C. rules D. ways Question 36. A. be spoken B. be examined C. be understood D. be talked Question 37. A. systems B. sounds C. languages D. talks Question 38. A. easy B. important C. simple D. expensive Question 39. A. grammar B. word C. vocabulary D. structure Question 40. A. fluent B. good C. perfect D. well Question 41. A. need B. grow C. express D. pass Question 42. A. main B. certain C. full D. most Question 43. A. talk B. say C. pass D. send Question 44. A. show B. ask C. understand D. know Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 45 to 54. Although speech is the most advanced form of communication, there are many ways of communicating without using speech. Signals, signs, symbols, and gestures may be found in every known culture. The basic function of signal is to impinge upon the environment in such a way that it attracts attention, as, for example, the dots and dashes of a telegraph circuit. Coded to refer to speech, the potential for communication is very great. Less adaptable to the codification of words, signs also contain meaning in and of themselves. A stop sign or a barber pole conveys meaning quickly and conveniently. Trang 3/6 – Mã đề thi 156 Symbols are more difficult to describe than either signals or signs because of their intricate relationship with the receiver’s cultural perceptions. In some cultures, applauding in a theater provides performers with an auditory symbol of approval. Gestures such as waving and handshaking also communicate certain cultural messages. Although signals, signs, symbols, and gestures are very useful, they do have a major disadvantage in communication. They usually do not allow ideas to be shared without the sender being directly adjacent to the receiver. Without an exchange of ideas, interaction comes to a halt. As a result, means of communication intended to be used for long distances and extended periods must be based upon speech. To radio, television, and the telephone, one must add fax, paging systems, electronic mail, and the Internet, and no one doubts but that there are more means of communication on the horizon. Question 45. Which of the following would be the best title for the passage? A. Gestures B. Signs and signals C. Speech D. Communication Question 46. What does the author say about speech? A. It is dependent upon the advances made by inventors. B. It is the most advanced form of communication. C. It is necessary for communication to occur. D. It is the only true form of communication. Question 47. According to the passage, what is a signal? A. A form of communication that interrupts the environment. B. The most difficult form of communication to describe. C. A form of communication which may be used across long distances. D. The form of communication most related to cultural perception. Question 48. The phrase “impinge upon” in paragraph 1 is closest in meaning to _______. A. prohibit B. intrude C. vary D. improve Question 49. The word “it” in paragraph refers to ________. A. way B. environment C. function D. signal Question 50. The word “potential” in paragraph 1 could be replaced by _______. A. advantage B. possibility C. organization D. range Question 51. The word “intricate” in paragraph 2 could best be replaced by _______. A. inefficient B. complicated C. historical D. uncertain Question 52. Applauding was cited as an example of _______. A. a signal B. a sign C. a gesture D. a symbol Question 53. Why were the telephone, radio, and television invented? A. Because people were unable to understand signs, signals, and symbols. B. Because people wanted to communicate across long distances. C. Because people believed that signs, signals, and symbols were obsolete. D. Because people wanted new forms of communication. Question 54. It may be concluded from this passage that_______. A. only some cultures have signs, signals, and symbols B. signs, signals, symbols, and gestures are forms of communication C. symbols are very easy to define and interrupt D. waving and handshaking are not related to culture Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 55 to 64. Trang 4/6 – Mã đề thi 156 A recent study shows that an unequal share of household chores is still the norm in many households, despite the fact that many more women now have jobs. In a survey of 1,256 people ages between 18 and 65, men said they contributed an average of 37% of the total housework, while the women estimated their share to be nearly double that, at 70%. This ratio was not affected by whether the woman was working or not. When they were asked what they thought was a fair division of labor, women with jobs felt that housework should be shared equally between male and female partners. Women who did not work outside the home were satisfied to perform 80% - the majority of the household work – if their husbands did remainder. Research has shown that, if levels increase beyond these percentages, women become unhappy and anxious, and feel they are unimportant. After marriage, a woman is reported to increase her household workload by 14 hours per week, but for men the amount is just 90 minutes. So the division of labor becomes unbalanced, as a man’s share increases much less than the woman’s. It is the inequality and loss of respect, not the actual number of hours, which leads to anxiety and depression. The research describes housework as thankless and unfulfilling. Activities included in the study were cooking, cleaning, shopping, doing laundry, washing up and childcare. Women who have jobs report that they feel overworked by these chores in addition to their professional duties. In contrast, full-time homemakers frequently anticipate going back to work when the children grow up. Distress for this group is caused by losing the teamwork in the marriage. In cases where men perform most of the housework, results were similar. The men also became depressed by the imbalance of labor. The research showed that the least distressed people are those who have equal share, implying that men could perform significantly more chores and even benefit from this. The research concludes “Everybody benefits from sharing the housework. Even for women keeping house, a share division of labor is important. If you decide to stay at home to raise the children, you don’t want to become the servant of the house”. Question 55. The word remainder in paragraph 2 is closest in meaning to ______ . A. what is done B. what is fulfilled C. what is left D. what is share Question 56. Although women think men should share the housework, those who don’t have paid job agree to share ______ of the chores. A. 14% B. 37% C. 70% D. 80% Question 57. After getting married, ______ . A. women have a bigger house B. men do more housework C. men do less housework D. women do twice as much housework Question 58. Working women ______ . A. want their partners to do an equal share B. are anxious and depressed C. do 80% of the household D. would prefer not to have a job Question 59. Women who do not have a job become depressed ______ . A. if they have to do more than half of the housework B. because they have no respect C. when their husbands do not help them D. if their husbands do 20% of the chores Question 60. The word norm in paragraph 1 is closest in meaning to ______ . A. changing thing B. strange thing C. usual thing D. unequal thing Question 61. According to the passage, a good relationship is the one in which ______ . A. men do more housework than women B. women and men divide the housework equally C. women do 80% of the housework D. women do 14 hours of housework Question 62. Objects of the survey were ______ . Trang 5/6 – Mã đề thi 156 A. people of a wide range of ages B. married people C. working people D. unemployed people Question 63. The word estimated in paragraph 1 is closest in meaning to ______ . A. wanted B. divided C. hoped D. guessed Question 64. What is the most suitable heading for the passage? A. Difficulties of working women B. Unequal housework division C. Reason for women to be distress D. How to be happy couples SECTION B (2 points) I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it. Write your answers on your answer sheet. Question 1. The play started as soon as we arrived at the theatre. Hardly____________________________________________________________________________ Question 2. The roses are so beautiful that everyone seeing them pays compliments. They______________________________________________________________________________ Question 3. We could see the view of the ocean only after the rain stopped. Not until___________________________________________________________________________ Question 4. It was wrong of you not to call the fire brigade at once. You_______________________________________________________________________________ Question 5. “If I were in your shoes, I would try to finish the pre-lab report before carrying out the experiment,” said the professor to his research student. The professor advised________________________________________________________________ II. In about 140 words, write a paragraph about some typical features of Vietnamese culture. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet. ----------- THE END ---------- Thí sinh không được sử dụng tài liệu. Cán bộ coi thi không giải thích gì thêm. Họ và tên thí sinh:.................................................... Số báo danh: .......................... Trang 6/6 – Mã đề thi 156 SỞ GD&ĐT BẮC GIANG HDC THI THỬ KỲ THI THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN 1 TRƯỜNG THPT NGÔ SĨ LIÊN Năm học 2015 - 2016 HDC có 02 trang Môn: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 12 SECTION A (8 points) Mã đề thi Câu hỏi 156 167 178 189 1. D B A C 2. C D A D 3. D A C B 4. C D A A 5. A C D C 6. D B C C 7. B B B B 8. D C D A 9. D D B D 10. B C A B 11. B A B D 12. A B D C 13. C A B D 14. B D B B 15. B C D A 16. C A B B 17. C C B D 18. A B D B 19. C B C B 20. D C B D 21. B C B B 22. C A C B 23. A C D A 24. B D C A 25. B B A D 26. D C B C 27. A A A A 28. A B B C 29. A D D A 30. C B A D 31. A D D C 32. D D C B 33. C B A C 34. B B C A 35. D A D B 36. C D B B 37. B B A C 38. B A C C 39. C B C A 40. D D B C 41. C B A D 42. A B D B 43. B D B B 44. A B D B 45. D B C A Trang 1/2 Mã đề thi Câu hỏi 156 167 178 189 46. B A B B 47. A A B C 48. B C A D 49. D A B B 50. B D C D 51. B C C D 52. D B A B 53. B C C D 54. B D D A 55. C B B D 56. D A C C 57. B C A B 58. A C B B 59. C B D C 60. C A B D 61. B D D C 62. A B D A 63. D D C B 64. B C B A SECTION B (2 points) I. 0.1 x 5 = 0.5 Question 1. Hardly had we arrived at the theatre when the play started. Question 2. They are such beautiful roses that everyone seeing them pays compliments. Question 3. Not until the rain stopped could we see the view of the ocean. Question 4. You should have called the fire brigade at once. Question 5. The professor advised his research student to try to finish the pre-lab report before carrying out the experiment. II. 1.5 Mô tả tiêu chí đánh giá: 1. Bố cục (0,40 điểm) 4. Nội dung (0,30 điểm) o Câu đề dẫn chủ đề mạch lạc o Đủ thuyết phục người đọc o Bố cục hợp lí rõ ràng phù hợp yêu cầu của đề bài o Đủ dẫn chứng, ví dụ, lập luận o Bố cục uyển chuyển từ mở bài đến kết luận o Độ dài: Số từ không nhiều hơn hoặc ít hơn so với 2. Phát triển ý (0,25 điểm) quy định 5% o Phát triển ý có trình tự logic 5. Ngữ pháp, dấu câu, và chính tả (0,25 điểm) o Có dẫn chứng, ví dụ, … đủ để bảo vệ ý kiến của o Sử dụng đúng dấu câu mình o Chính tả: Viết đúng chính tả 3. Sử dụng ngôn từ (0,30 điểm) _ Lỗi chính tả gây hiểu nhầm / sai lệch ý sẽ bị tính o Sử dụng ngôn từ phù hợp nội dung một lỗi (trừ 1% điểm của bài viết) o Sử dụng ngôn từ đúng văn phong / thể loại _ Cùng một lỗi chính tả lặp lại chỉ tính là một lỗi o Sử dụng từ nối các ý cho bài viết uyển chuyển o Sử dụng đúng thời, thể, cấu trúc câu đúng ngữ pháp. (Lỗi ngữ pháp gây hiểu nhầm / sai lệch ý sẽ bị trừ 1% điểm bài viết) - Điểm phần trắc nghiệm: Mỗi câu đúng 1,125đ iểm x64 câu= 8 điểm - Điểm phần viết: Part I: Mỗi câu đúng 0,1 điểm x5 câu = 0,5 điểm Part II: 1,5 điểm Điểm cuối cùng: Lấy tổng điểm phần trắc nghiệm và phần viết. ----------- THE END ---------- Trang 2/2 Sở Giáo dục- Đào tạo Thanh Hoá ĐỀ THI THỬ THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN I NĂM 2016 Trường THPT Bỉm Sơn Môn : Tiếng Anh DeThiThu .Net Thời gian làm bài : 90 phút, không kể thời gian phát đề (Đề này gồm 06 trang ) Mã đề thi 132 Họ, tên thí sinh:.......................................................................... Số báo danh:............................................................................... SECTION A (8 points): Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the words whose pronunciation is different from the others in each of the following questions. Question 1: A. works B. stops C. washes D. speaks Question 2. A. amount B. astound C. mouthful D. shoulder Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word that differs from the rest in the position of the main stress in each of the following questions. Question 3. A. apply B. visit C. appear D. attend Question 4. A. curriculum B. kindergarten C. contaminate D.conventional Question 5. A. suspicious B. marvellous C. physical D. argument Mark the letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer that best completes each unfinished sentence. Question 6. This is a valuable ................ chair which dates back to the eighteeth century. A. traditional B. old-fashioned C. antique D. ancient Question 7. Look! The yard is wet. It______ last night. A. must have rained B. couldn't have rained C. must rain D. should have rained Question 8. Last year she earned _______ her brother. A. twice as much as B. twice more than C. twice as many as D. twice as more as Question 9. The girls and flowers ______ he painted were vivid. A. whose B. that C. which D. who Question 10. When his alarm went off, he shut it off and slept for ________15 minutes. A. other B. others C. another D. the others Question 11. Is it necessary that I _____ here tomorrow? A. am being B. were C. be D. would be Question 12. I saw him hiding something in a_______ bag. A. small plastic black B. black small plastic C. small black plastic D. plastic small black Question 13.This is the __________spot on which the first pilgrims landed in America. A. historic B. historical C. history D. historicity Question 14. She earned a degree in Physics and went on _________ another degree in Mathematics. A. taking B. to take C. taken D. being taken Question 15. Those trousers are far too big. Why don’t you have them___? A. taken on B. taken in C. taken over D. taken out Question 16. So little_______about mathematics that the lecture was completely beyond me. A. I have known B. I knew C. do I know D. did I know Question 17. I gave the waiter a$50 note and waited for my _________. A. change B. supply C. cash D. cost Trang 1/6 - Mã đề thi 132 Question 18. I read the contract again and again _________ avoiding making spelling mistakes. A. in terms of B. by means of C. with a view to D. in view of Question 19. Van Gogh suffered from depression ______ by overwork and ill-health. A. brought on B. coming about C. taken up D. pull through Question 20. He had spent ____________ time writing an essay on his childhood. A. a few B. a large number of C. a great deal of D. many Question 21. ________he study harder, he will do better in the exam. A. Should B. If C.When D. Unless Question 22. When there are small children around, it is better to put breakable ornaments out of _________. A. reach B. hand C. place D. hold Question 23. Harry:" ______________" Kate: "Yes. I'd like to buy a computer." A. Do you look for something? B. Good morning. Can I help you? C. Excuse me. Do you want to buy it? D. Can you help me buy something? Question 24. Tom: “ Sorry, I forgot to phone you last night.” -Mary: “________” A. I have nothing to tell you. B. Oh. Poor me! C. Never mind! D. You was absent - minded. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) CLOSEST in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 25. Whenever Susan invites us to dinner, she customarily prepares a lot of delicious food. A. naturally B. necessarily C. usually D. certainly Question 26. It is hoped that illiteracy will soon be eradicated in our country as more and more people are struggling against it. A. evolving B. plunging C. starting D. striving Question 27. His new yatch is certainly an ostentatious display of his wealth. A. beautiful B. showy C. large D. expensive Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the underlined part that needs correction in each of the following questions. Question 28. After writing it, the essay must be duplicated by the student himself and handed in to the A B C department secretary before the end of the month. D Question 29. All of the cities in Texas, San Antonio is probably the most picturesque. A B C D Question 30. My cousin composes not only the music, but also sings the songs for the maior A B C D Broadway musicals. Question 31. The Indians of the southwestern United States are famous for their beautiful A art work, especially handmade jewelry cast from silver, carved from stones, or decorations with B C D beads and feathers. Question 32. Although no country has exactly the same folk music as those of any other, it is A B significant that similar songs exist among widely separated people. C D Trang 2/6 - Mã đề thi 132 Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct word or phrase that best fits each of the numbered blanks from 33 to 42. Environmental Concerns Earth is the only place we know of in the universe that can support human life. (33) ______ human activities are making the planet less fit to live on. As the western world carries on consuming (34)_______ of the world's resources while half of the world's population do so just to stay (35)_______ we are rapidly destroying the only resource we have (36)________ which all people can survive and prosper. Everywhere fertile soil is (37)______ built on or washed into the sea. Renewable resources are exploited so much that they will never be able to recover (38)______. We discharge pollutants into the atmosphere without any thought of the consequences. As a (39)______, the planet's ability to support people is being reduced at the very time when rising human numbers and consumption are making increasingly heavy demands on it. The Earth's (40)______ resources are there for us to use. We need food, water, air, energy, medicines, warmth, shelter and minerals to (41)______ us fed, comfortable, healthy and active. If we are sensible in how we use the resources they will last indefinitely. But if we use them wastefully and excessively they will soon (42)_______ and everyone will suffer. Question 33: A. Still B. Despite C. Yet D. Although Question 34: A. two-thirds B. two- third C. two-three D. two-threes Question 35: A. survival B. alive C. existent D. live Question 36: A. on B. at C. in D. by Question 37: A. sooner B. rather C. either D. neither Question 38: A. completely B. quite C. greatly D. utterly Question 39: A. result B. product C. development D. reaction Question 40: A. natural B. real C. living D. genuine Question 41: A. stay B. keep C. maintain D. hold Question 42: A. run out B. run away C. run up D. run off Mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the word(s) OPPOSITE in meaning to the underlined word(s) in each of the following questions. Question 43: The aircraft carrier is indispensable in naval operations against sea or shore based enemies. A. unique B. novel C. unnecessary D. exotic Question 44. This shouldn’t be too taxing for you. A. comfortable B. demanding C. easy D. relaxing Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 45 to 54. Basic to any understanding of Canada in the 20 years after the Second World War is the country’s impressive population growth. For every three Canadians in 1945, there were over five in 1966. In September 1966 Canada’s population passed the 20 million mark. Most of his surging growth came from natural increase. The depression of the 1930’s and the war had held back marriages, and the catching-up process began after 1945. The baby boom continued through the decade of the 1950’s, producing a population increase of nearly fifteen percent in the five years from 1951 to 1956. This rate of increase had been exceeded only once before settle. Undoubtedly, the good economic conditions of the 1950’s supported a growth in the population, but the expansion also derived from a trend toward earlier marriages and an increase in the average size of families. In 1957 the Canadian birth rate stood at 28 per thousand, one of the highest in the world. After the peak year of 1957, the birth rate in Canada began to decline. It continued falling until in 1966 it stood at the lowest level in 25 years. Partly this decline reflected the low level of births during the depression and the war, but it was also caused by changes in Canadian society. Young Trang 3/6 - Mã đề thi 132 people were staying at school longer; more women were working; young married couples were buying automobiles or houses before starting families; rising living standards were cutting down the size of families.It appeared that Canada was once more falling in step with the trend toward smaller families that had occurred all through the Western world since the time of the Industrial Revolution. Although the growth in Canada’s population had slowed down by 1966 (the increase in the first half of the 1960’s was only nine percent), another large population wave was coming over the horizon. It would be composed of the children who were born during the period of the high birth rate prior to 1957. Question 45. What does the passage mainly discuss? A. Educational changes in Canadian society. B. Canada during the Second World War. C. Population trends in postwar Canada. D. Standards of living in Canada. Question 46. According to the passage, when did Canada’s baby boom begin? A. In the decade after 1911 B. After 1945 C. During the depression of the 1930’s D. In 1966 Question 47. The word “five” in line 2 refers to__________. A. Canadians B. years C. decades D. marriages Question 48. The word “surging” in line 3 is closest in meaning to__________. A. new B. extra C. accelerating D. surprising Question 49. The author suggests that in Canada during the 1950’s____. A. the urban population decreased rapidly B. fewer people married C. economic conditions were poor D. the birth rate was very high Question 50. The word “trend” in line 8 is closest in meaning to__________. A. tendency B. aim C. growth D. directive Question 51. The word “peak” in line 11 is closest in meaning to___________. A. pointed B. dismal C. mountain D. maximum Question 52. When was the birth rate in Canada at its lowest postwar level? A. 1966 B. 1957 C. 1956 D. 1951 Question 53. The author mentions all of the following as causes of declines in population growth after 1957 EXCEPT__________. A. people being better educated B. people getting married earlier C. better standards of living D. couples buying houses Question 54. It can be inferred from the passage that before the Industrial Revolution _________. A. families were larger B. population statistics were unreliable C. the population grew steadily. D. economic conditions were bad Read the following passage and mark the letter A, B, C, or D on your answer sheet to indicate the correct answer to each of the questions from 55 to 64. Ethology is concerned with the study of adaptive, or survival, value of behavior and its Evolutionary history. Ethological theory began to be applied to research on children in the1960’s but has become even more influential today. The origins of ethology can be traced to the work of Darwin. Its modern foundations were laid by two European zoologists, Konrad Lorenz and Niko Tinbergen. Watching the behaviors diverse animal species in their natural habitats, Lorenz, and Tinbergen observed behavior patterns that promote survival. The most well-known of these is imprinting, the early following behavior of certain baby birds that ensures that the young will stay close to their mother and be fed and protected from danger. Imprinting takes place during an early, restricted time period of development. If the mother goose is not present during this time, but an object resembling her in important features is, young goslings may imprint on it instead . Observations of imprinting led to major concept that has been applied in child development” the critical period . It refers to a limited times span during which the child is biologically prepared to acquire certain adaptive behaviors but Trang 4/6 - Mã đề thi 132 needs the support of suitably stimulating environment. Many researchers have conducted studies to find out whether complex cognitive and social behaviors must be learned during restricted time periods. for example, if children are deprived of adequate food or physical and social stimulation during the early years of life, will their intelligence be permanently impaired? If language is not mastered during the preschool years, is the child’s capacity to acquire it reduced? Inspired by observations of imprinting, in 1969 the British psychoanalyst John Bowlby applied ethological theory to the understanding of the relationship between an infant and its parents. He argued that attachment behaviors of babies, such as smiling, babbling, grasping, and crying, are built-in social signals that encourage the parents to approach, care for, and interact with the baby. By keeping a parent near, these behaviors help ensure that the baby will be fed, protected from danger, and provided with the stimulation and affection necessary for healthy growth. The development of attachment in human infants is a lengthy process involving changes in psychological structures that lead to a deep affectional tie between parent and baby. Question 55: What was Darwin’s contribution to ethology? A. Darwin was the first person to apply ethological theory to children. B. Darwin’s work provided the basis for ethology. C. Darwin was the professor who taught Lorenz and Tinbergen. D. Darwin improved on the original principles of ethology. Question 56: The word “foundations” in line 4 is closest in meaning to______. A. institutions B. inventions C. discoveries D. researches Question 57: The word “ensures” in line 7 is closest in meaning to __________. A. assumes B. guarantees C. proves D. teaches Question 58: According to the passage, if a mother goose is not present during the time period when imprinting takes place, which of the following will most likely occur? A. The mother will later imprint on the gosling. B. The gosling may not find a mate when it matures. C. The gosling will not imprint on any object. D. The gosling may imprint on another object. Question 59: The word “He” in line 19 refers to __________. A. an infant B. a psychoanalyst C. parent D. a baby Question 60: The word “acquire” in line 12 is closest in meaning to __________. A. gain B. reach C. have D. work Question 61: The author mentions all of the following as attachment behaviors of human infants EXCEPT__________. A. smiling B. crying C. eating D. grasping Question 62: According to the passage, attachment behaviors of infants are intended to___________. A. prepare the infant to cope with separation B. provide the infant with a means of self-stimulation C. allow the infant to become imprinted on objects that resemble the parent D. get the physical, emotional and social needs of the infant met Question 63: The phrase “affectional tie” in line 24 is closest in meaning to _________. A. behavioral change B. psychological need C. cognitive development D. emotional attachment Question 64: It can be inferred from the passage that ethological theory assumes that __________. A. failure to imprint has no influence on intelligence B. to learn about human behavior only human subjects should be studied C. there are similarities between animal and human behavior D. the notion of critical periods applies only to animals Trang 5/6 - Mã đề thi 132 SECTION B (2 points): I.Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it.Write your answers on your answer sheet.(0.5points) Question 1: It is said that the Great Pyramid of Giza was built over a 20-year period. The Great Pyramid of Giza ……………………………………………………… Question 2: Mary started learning English 3 years ago. Mary has .............................................................................. Question 3: Mr. Smith knew little about the Internet, so he didn’t invest into any computer companies. Had …………………………………………………………………….................. Question 4: We can’t have breakfast in the garden because it is very cold. It is so………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Question 5: Immediately after his arrival, things went wrong. Hardly………………………………………………………………………………. II. In about 140 words, write a paragraph about the benefits of playing sports. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet.(1,5 points). The following prompts might be helpful to you. - Keeping fit and healthy - Entertaining and relaxing - Earning money ----------- THE END ---------- Trang 6/6 - Mã đề thi 132 TRƯỜNG THPT BỈM SƠN ĐÁP ÁN ĐỀ THI THỬ THPT QUỐC GIA LẦN I NĂM 2016 http://dethithu.net Môn : Tiếng Anh SECTION A (8 points): CÂU Mã 132 Mã 209 Mã 357 Mã 485 1. C D A D 2. D A A A 3. B B D A 4. B C D B 5. A A C A 6. C D C D 7. A A A A 8. A D D B 9. B A B A 10. C A D D 11. C A A B 12. C B D D 13. A A D B 14. B C B B 15. B C A A 16. D C B B 17. A C B A 18. C A A A 19. A B A B 20. C B D D 21. A C C D 22. A A C D 23. B B B B 24. C C C C 25. C A A D 26. D C B B 27. B A B A 28. A B C C 29. A B B A 30. A D A C 31. D B A A 32. B C A D 33. C A D A 34. A B D A 35. B A D C 36. D D A C 37. C A A C 38. A A D C 39. A D D A 40. A B C B 41. B C C C 42. A A B C 1 43. C D A B 44. C D B B 45. C A A B 46. B C C D 47. A A A A Câu Mã 132 Mã 209 Mã 357 Mã 485 48. C A A D 49. D B D A 50. A C C B 51. D C A B 52. A D B D 53. B C A C 54. A C C B 55. B C C B 56. A D C B 57. B C C A 58. D A C B 59. B C D C 60. A A D C 61. C B B C 62. D B B C 63. D B A A 64. C C B A SECTION B (2 points): I.Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it means the same as the sentence printed before it.Write your answers on your answer sheet.(0.5points) Mã 132: Question 1: The Great Pyramid of Giza is said to have been built over a 20-year period. Question 2: Mary has been learning/ has learnt English for 3 years. Question 3: Had Mr. Smith known much about the Internet, he would have invested into some computer companies. Question 4: It is so cold that we can’t have breakfast in the garden. Question 5: Hardly had he arrived when things went wrong. Mã 209: Question 1: Had Mr. Smith known much about the Internet, he would have invested into some computer companies. Question 2: Mary has been learning/ has learnt English for 3 years. Question 3: Great Pyramid of Giza is said to have been built over a 20-year period. Question 4: It is so cold that we can’t have breakfast in the garden. Question 5: Hardly had he arrived when things went wrong. Mã 357: Question 1: Hardly had he arrived when things went wrong. Question 2: The Great Pyramid of Giza is said to have been built over a 20-year period. Question 3: Had Mr. Smith known much about the Internet, he would have invested into some computer companies. Question 4: It is so cold that we can’t have breakfast in the garden. Question 5: Mary has been learning/ has learnt English for 3 years. Mã 485: Question 1: The Great Pyramid of Giza is said to have been built over a 20-year period. 2 Question 2: Mary has been learning/ has learnt English for 3 years. Question 3: Had Mr. Smith known much about the Internet, he would have invested into some computer companies. Question 4: It is so cold that we can’t have breakfast in the garden. Question 5: Hardly had he arrived when things went wrong. II. In about 140 words, write a paragraph about the benefits of playing sports. Write your paragraph on your answer sheet.(1,5 points). -Viết đúng format: 0,4 điểm (đúng cấu trúc đoạn văn - Nội dung: 0,5 điểm, phát triển ý - Từ vựng cấu trúc, từ nối: 0,3 điểm - Ngữ pháp, dấu câu, chính tả, liên kết câu: 0,3 điểm Mô tả tiêu chí đánh giá Điểm tối đa 1. Bố cục 0.40 Câu dẫn chủ đề mạch lạc Bố cục hơp lý rõ rang phù hợp yêu cầu của đề bài Bố cục uyển chuyển từ mở bài đến kết luận 2. Phát triển ý 0.25 Phát triển ý có trình tự logic Có dẫn chứng, ví dụ đủ để bảo vệ ý kiến của mình 3. Sử dụng ngôn từ 0.30 Sử dụng ngôn từ phù hợp nội dung Sử dụng ngôn từ đúng văn phòng thể loại Sử dung từ nối các ý cho bài viết uyển chuyển 4. Nội dung 0.30 Đủ thuyết phục người đọc Đủ dẫn chứng, ví dụ lập luận Độ dài: Số từ không nhiều hơn hoặc ít hơn so với quy định 5% 5. Ngữ pháp, dấu câu và chính tả 0.25 Sử dụng đúng dấu câu Chính tả: viết đúng chính tả Lỗi chính tả gây hiểu nhầm/sai lệch ý sẽ bị tính một lỗi ( trừ 1% điểm bài viết) Sử dụng đúng thời, thể, cấu trúc câu đúng ngữ pháp (lỗi ngữ pháp gây hiểu nhầm/sai lệch ý sẽ bị trừ 1% điểm bài viết) Tổng 1.50 3